Adobe Pagemaker 6 5 Training Manual ManualsLib Makes It Easy To Find Manuals Online!

2014-12-12

: Adobe Adobe-Pagemaker-6-5-Training-Manual-118820 adobe-pagemaker-6-5-training-manual-118820 adobe pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 490

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Adobe PageMaker 6.5
Foundation Level
Training Manual
Corporate Edition

C C T G L O B A L

.C O M

© 1995-2001 Cheltenham Computer Training
Crescent House
24 Lansdown Crescent Lane
Cheltenham
Gloucestershire
GL50 2LD, UK
Tel: +44 (0)1242 227200
Fax: +44 (0)1242 253200
Email: info@cctglobal.com
Internet: http://www.cctglobal.com
All trademarks acknowledged. E&OE.
© Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 No part of this document may be copied without written permission from
Cheltenham Computer Training unless produced under the terms of a courseware site license agreement with
Cheltenham Computer Training.
All reasonable precautions have been taken in the preparation of this document, including both technical and nontechnical proofing. Cheltenham Computer Training and all staff assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions. No
warranties are made, expressed or implied with regard to these notes. Cheltenham Computer Training shall not be
responsible for any direct, incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of any material contained in this
document. If you find any errors in these training modules, please inform Cheltenham Computer Training. Whilst every
effort is made to eradicate typing or technical mistakes, we apologize for any errors you may detect. All courses are
updated on a regular basis, so your feedback is both valued by us and will help us to maintain the highest possible
standards.
Sample versions of courseware from Cheltenham Computer Training
(Normally supplied in Adobe Acrobat format)
If the version of courseware that you are viewing is marked as NOT FOR TRAINING, SAMPLE, or similar, then it cannot
be used as part of a training course, and is made available purely for content and style review. This is to give you the
opportunity to preview our courseware, prior to making a purchasing decision. Sample versions may not be re-sold to a
third party.
For current license information
Cheltenham Computer Training reserves the right to alter the licensing conditions at any time, without prior notice. No
terms or conditions will affect your rights as defined under UK law. Please see the site license agreement available at:
www.cctglobal.com/agreement

Courseware Release Version 5.0

INTRODUCTION TO PAGEMAKER ...................................................................................................... 1
WHAT IS PAGEMAKER 6.5? ........................................................................................................................ 2
What is PageMaker?.............................................................................................................................. 2
Types of output....................................................................................................................................... 2
Adobe PageMaker website..................................................................................................................... 2
PAGEMAKER EXTENSIONS .......................................................................................................................... 3
Extensions.............................................................................................................................................. 3
Using Publication files .......................................................................................................................... 3
Using Template files .............................................................................................................................. 3
GENERAL PREFERENCES ............................................................................................................................. 4
Using General Preferences.................................................................................................................... 4
Setting Measurement ............................................................................................................................. 5
Setting the Vertical Ruler....................................................................................................................... 5
Setting the Graphics Display ................................................................................................................. 5
Setting the Control Palette..................................................................................................................... 5
Setting the Save Option.......................................................................................................................... 6
Applying Guides..................................................................................................................................... 6
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................... 7
PAGEMAKER INTERFACE ..................................................................................................................... 9
WORK ENVIRONMENT .............................................................................................................................. 10
Using the PageMaker Environment..................................................................................................... 10
Using Blank Pages............................................................................................................................... 11
Using the Pasteboard .......................................................................................................................... 11
TOOLBOX .................................................................................................................................................. 12
Using the Toolbox................................................................................................................................ 12
COLORS PALETTE ..................................................................................................................................... 13
Using the Colors Palette...................................................................................................................... 13
CONTROL PALETTE ................................................................................................................................... 15
Using the Control Palette .................................................................................................................... 15
Using the Character View.................................................................................................................... 15
Using the Paragraph View .................................................................................................................. 16
Using the Object View ......................................................................................................................... 17
RULERS/GUIDES ....................................................................................................................................... 18
Using Rulers ........................................................................................................................................ 18
To Change the Ruler Measurements.................................................................................................... 18
Using the Zero Point Option................................................................................................................ 18
Using Guides ....................................................................................................................................... 19
To add a Guide .................................................................................................................................... 19
To remove a Guide............................................................................................................................... 19
Applying the Snap to Option................................................................................................................ 19
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 20
DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................................................................ 21
NEW DOCUMENTS..................................................................................................................................... 22
Creating New Documents .................................................................................................................... 22
Using the Document Setup dialog box................................................................................................. 23
Applying Page Size .............................................................................................................................. 23
Applying Dimensions ........................................................................................................................... 23
Applying Orientation ........................................................................................................................... 23
Applying Options ................................................................................................................................. 24
Applying Number of Pages .................................................................................................................. 24
Applying Start Page # .......................................................................................................................... 24
Applying the Margins .......................................................................................................................... 24
FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Changing the Document Setup ............................................................................................................ 25
MASTER PAGES......................................................................................................................................... 26
Setting Up Master Pages ..................................................................................................................... 26
To Display the Master Page content.................................................................................................... 27
SAVING DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................................................ 28
Using the Save and Save As commands............................................................................................... 28
File Types ............................................................................................................................................ 30
OPENING DOCUMENTS .............................................................................................................................. 31
Using the Open command.................................................................................................................... 31
Using the Open As option .................................................................................................................... 32
PANOSE Font Matching...................................................................................................................... 32
Using the Cannot Find dialog box....................................................................................................... 32
CLOSING DOCUMENTS .............................................................................................................................. 33
Using the Close command ................................................................................................................... 33
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 34
TOOLS ........................................................................................................................................................ 35
BASIC TOOLS ............................................................................................................................................ 36
Using the Pointer Tool......................................................................................................................... 36
Using the Text Tool.............................................................................................................................. 36
Using the Rotating Tool....................................................................................................................... 36
Using the Cropping Tool ..................................................................................................................... 36
DRAWING TOOLS ...................................................................................................................................... 37
Using Drawing Tools........................................................................................................................... 37
Using the Line Tool ............................................................................................................................. 37
Using the Constrained Line Tool......................................................................................................... 37
Using the Rectangle Tool..................................................................................................................... 38
Using the Rectangle Frame Tool ......................................................................................................... 38
Using the Ellipse Tool ......................................................................................................................... 38
Using the Ellipse Frame Tool.............................................................................................................. 38
Using the Polygon Tool ....................................................................................................................... 38
Using the Polygon Frame Tool............................................................................................................ 38
VISUAL TOOLS .......................................................................................................................................... 39
Using Visual Tools............................................................................................................................... 39
Using the Hand Tool............................................................................................................................ 39
To move your page............................................................................................................................... 39
Using the Zoom Tool ........................................................................................................................... 39
To magnify part of a page by dragging ............................................................................................... 40
To zoom in and out while using another tool....................................................................................... 40
MODIFYING TOOLS ................................................................................................................................... 41
Using the Preferences dialog box ........................................................................................................ 41
Using the Character Specifications dialog box ................................................................................... 42
Using the Custom Stroke dialog box.................................................................................................... 42
Using the Rounded Corners dialog box............................................................................................... 43
Using the Fill and Stroke dialog box ................................................................................................... 44
Using the Frame Options dialog box................................................................................................... 45
Using the Polygon Settings dialog box ................................................................................................ 46
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 47
COLORS AND FILLS ............................................................................................................................... 49
CUSTOM COLORS ...................................................................................................................................... 50
Using the Define Colors dialog box..................................................................................................... 50
Creating Colors ................................................................................................................................... 51
Editing Colors...................................................................................................................................... 51
Removing Colors ................................................................................................................................. 51
COLOR OPTIONS DIALOG BOX .................................................................................................................. 52
FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Using the Color Options dialog box .................................................................................................... 52
Applying a Color Name ....................................................................................................................... 53
Applying Color Type............................................................................................................................ 53
Applying a Color Model ...................................................................................................................... 54
Applying a Color Field ........................................................................................................................ 54
Previewing Colors ............................................................................................................................... 54
COLORS PALETTE ..................................................................................................................................... 55
Using the Stroke Button ....................................................................................................................... 55
Using the Fill Button ........................................................................................................................... 56
Using the Both Button.......................................................................................................................... 56
Applying the Tint Percentage .............................................................................................................. 56
Using the Color Icon ........................................................................................................................... 56
Using the Color Model Icon ................................................................................................................ 57
Using the Color Type Icon................................................................................................................... 57
Using the EPS Color Icon.................................................................................................................... 57
Using the Color-Level Tint Icon .......................................................................................................... 57
Using the CMS Display........................................................................................................................ 57
Using the New Color Button ................................................................................................................ 57
Using the Trash Button ........................................................................................................................ 57
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 58
TEXT ........................................................................................................................................................... 59
BLOCKS VS. FRAMES ................................................................................................................................ 60
Using Text Blocks ................................................................................................................................ 60
To Create a Text Block ........................................................................................................................ 60
To Resize a Text Block ......................................................................................................................... 61
Overset Text Icon ................................................................................................................................. 61
Using Text Frames............................................................................................................................... 62
To Create a Text Frame....................................................................................................................... 62
To Resize a Text Frame ....................................................................................................................... 63
Overset Text Icon ................................................................................................................................. 63
INPUTTING TEXT ....................................................................................................................................... 64
Inputting text into a Text Block............................................................................................................ 64
Inputting text into a Text Frame .......................................................................................................... 65
PLACING TEXT .......................................................................................................................................... 66
Using the Place dialog box.................................................................................................................. 66
Choosing File Name ............................................................................................................................ 68
Choosing File Types ............................................................................................................................ 68
Kind field ............................................................................................................................................. 68
Size field............................................................................................................................................... 68
Last Modified field ............................................................................................................................... 68
Setting Place ........................................................................................................................................ 69
Setting Options..................................................................................................................................... 69
Text-Only Import Filters...................................................................................................................... 70
EDITING TEXT ........................................................................................................................................... 71
To Highlight Text in a Text frame or text block with the mouse .......................................................... 71
To Highlight Text in a Text frame or text block with the keyboard...................................................... 72
Adding and Removing text ................................................................................................................... 72
Copying, Cutting and Pasting text ....................................................................................................... 72
To Copy Text........................................................................................................................................ 72
To Paste the copied Text...................................................................................................................... 72
To Cut Text and Paste.......................................................................................................................... 73
To Paste the cut Text............................................................................................................................ 73
TEXT CONTROL PALETTE.......................................................................................................................... 74
Using the Character View.................................................................................................................... 74
Using the Paragraph View .................................................................................................................. 74
FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

CHARACTER SPECIFICATIONS DIALOG BOX .............................................................................................. 75
Using the Character Specifications dialog box ................................................................................... 75
To display the Character Specifications dialog box ............................................................................ 75
Choosing Font Names.......................................................................................................................... 75
Setting Font Size .................................................................................................................................. 76
Setting Leading .................................................................................................................................... 76
Setting Horizontal Scale ...................................................................................................................... 76
Setting text Color ................................................................................................................................. 76
Setting Color Tint ................................................................................................................................ 76
Setting Type Style................................................................................................................................. 77
Setting Position.................................................................................................................................... 78
Setting Case ......................................................................................................................................... 78
Setting Track........................................................................................................................................ 78
Setting Line End................................................................................................................................... 78
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 79
PICTURES.................................................................................................................................................. 81
PLACING PICTURES ................................................................................................................................... 82
Using the Place dialog box.................................................................................................................. 82
Choosing File Types ............................................................................................................................ 83
Kind Field ............................................................................................................................................ 83
Size Field ............................................................................................................................................. 83
Last Modified Field.............................................................................................................................. 83
Setting Place ........................................................................................................................................ 83
Linking and Embedding Pictures......................................................................................................... 84
Retaining Cropping Data..................................................................................................................... 84
MODIFYING PICTURE ................................................................................................................................ 85
Using the Object View ......................................................................................................................... 85
Positioning pictures on page ............................................................................................................... 85
Setting the Frame Size ......................................................................................................................... 86
Setting the picture Scale ...................................................................................................................... 86
Rotating picture ................................................................................................................................... 86
Skewing picture.................................................................................................................................... 86
Flipping pictures.................................................................................................................................. 86
To Copy a Picture................................................................................................................................ 87
To Paste the copied picture ................................................................................................................. 87
To Cut a picture ................................................................................................................................... 87
To Past the cut picture......................................................................................................................... 87
Wrapping Text around pictures ........................................................................................................... 87
Colorizing pictures .............................................................................................................................. 87
To Colorize a bitmap ........................................................................................................................... 87
CROPPING ................................................................................................................................................. 88
Cropping pictures ................................................................................................................................ 88
Positioning pictures in Frame ............................................................................................................. 89
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 90
OBJECTS.................................................................................................................................................... 91
SELECTING OBJECTS ................................................................................................................................. 92
Selecting single Object with the Pointer Tool...................................................................................... 92
Selecting multiple Objects with the Pointer Tool................................................................................. 93
Selecting Objects with the Marquee Box ............................................................................................. 94
GROUPED OBJECTS ................................................................................................................................... 95
Grouping Objects................................................................................................................................. 95
Ungrouping Objects............................................................................................................................. 95
MOVING OBJECTS ..................................................................................................................................... 96
Moving objects using the Mouse.......................................................................................................... 96
FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Moving objects using the Control Palette............................................................................................ 97
Removing Objects ................................................................................................................................ 97
ALIGNING OBJECTS................................................................................................................................... 98
Using the Align Objects dialog box ..................................................................................................... 98
Setting the Align Icons ......................................................................................................................... 99
Setting the Distribute Icons.................................................................................................................. 99
Using the Alignment Preview ............................................................................................................ 100
ARRANGING OBJECTS ............................................................................................................................. 101
Using the Arrange menu .................................................................................................................... 101
Using Send to Back............................................................................................................................ 102
Using Send Backward........................................................................................................................ 102
Using Bring To Front ........................................................................................................................ 102
Using Bring Forward ........................................................................................................................ 103
REVIEW QUESTIONS................................................................................................................................ 104
OUTPUT ................................................................................................................................................... 105
PRINTING YOUR WORK........................................................................................................................... 106
Using the Print dialog box................................................................................................................. 106
PRINT DOCUMENT .................................................................................................................................. 107
Setting Print Document options ......................................................................................................... 107
Selecting a Printer ............................................................................................................................. 107
Printing multiple Copies.................................................................................................................... 108
Collating pages.................................................................................................................................. 108
Reversing pages ................................................................................................................................. 108
Setting Pages ..................................................................................................................................... 108
Printing Page Ranges ........................................................................................................................ 109
Setting Non-Printing option............................................................................................................... 109
To create a Non-printing object......................................................................................................... 109
To hide or display non-printing objects in your publication: ............................................................ 109
Printing Blank Pages......................................................................................................................... 109
Orientation Options / Icons ............................................................................................................... 110
PRINT PAPER ........................................................................................................................................... 111
Setting Print Paper options................................................................................................................ 111
Choosing Paper Sizes ........................................................................................................................ 112
Choosing Paper Source ..................................................................................................................... 112
Printing Printer’s Marks ................................................................................................................... 112
Printing Page Information................................................................................................................. 112
Tiling Pages....................................................................................................................................... 113
Scaling Pages..................................................................................................................................... 113
Printing Thumbnails .......................................................................................................................... 113
To Print Thumbnail proofs ................................................................................................................ 114
Using Fit Preview .............................................................................................................................. 114
PRINT OPTIONS ....................................................................................................................................... 116
Setting Print Options ......................................................................................................................... 116
Sending Image Data .......................................................................................................................... 117
PRINT COLOR .......................................................................................................................................... 118
Setting Print Color options ................................................................................................................ 118
Composite Printing ............................................................................................................................ 119
Black and White Printing................................................................................................................... 119
PRINT FEATURES..................................................................................................................................... 120
Setting Print Features options ........................................................................................................... 120
REVIEW QUESTIONS................................................................................................................................ 122

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Introduction to PageMaker
PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

1
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Introduction to PageMaker
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Use Publication files
Use Template files
Use General Preferences
Set the Measurement In
Set the Vertical ruler
Set the Graphics Display
Set the Control Palette
Set the Save Options
Apply Guides

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Introduction to PageMaker

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

What is PageMaker 6.5?

PageMaker is a page layout application
© Cheltenham Computer Training 2001

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 2

What is
PageMaker?

•

This course will teach you the fundamentals of PageMaker 6.5. It is a
page layout application. You can use PageMaker to create complex
multi-page publications such as Text Books, Magazines and Novels,
or single page publications such as a personal letter or a simple
business card.

Types of
output

•

PageMaker 6.5 publications can be outputted to high-end or low-end
printers, saved as HTML files, and may even be saved as PDF files for
placement in other applications.

Adobe
PageMaker
website

•

If you don’t already have PageMaker 6.5 you can download a Demo
Version from the Adobe website at http://www.adobe.com and use it
for 30 days before having to purchase it. This is a great opportunity to
learn the program and see if you like it, before investing in it.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Introduction to PageMaker

3
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

PageMaker Extensions

•

PageMaker uses two kind
of Extensions:
.P65 (Publication files)
.T65 (Template files )

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 3

Extensions

•

PageMaker uses two kind of extensions, .P65 and .T65

Using
Publication
files

•

The .P65 extension represents PageMaker Publication files, which
all of your work will be saved as this file type by default. PageMaker
publication files are displayed in windows by the following icon:

Note: The PageMaker extensions and icons also make it easier to
distinguish PageMaker files from other applications files.
Using
Template
files

•

The .T65 extension represents PageMaker Template files. These are
used to save you time when using the same layout as the publications
over again. You might consider creating a template to use as your
starting point at the beginning of every production cycle, saving time
and ensuring consistency.

Note: Templates have the .T65 extension. The only real difference
between a template and a publication is when you open the former;
you open a copy rather than the original.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Introduction to PageMaker

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

General Preferences

General Preferences
•

This dialog box allows you
to create defaults for how
PageMaker will treat the
content in your
publications such as your
text, save your files, move
items, measure items, and
display guides .

Using
General
Preferences

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 4

•

From the main menu, choose File > Preferences > General to open the
General Preferences dialog box.
OR press the Ctrl + K key combination:

•

This dialog box allows you to create defaults for how PageMaker will treat
the content in your publications such as your text, save your files, move
items, measure items, and display guides.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Introduction to PageMaker
PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

5
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Setting
Measurement

•

While the default Measurement system is inches, you can change the
measurement units to picas, millimeters, and ciceros:

Setting the
Vertical Ruler

•

The Vertical Ruler default setting is inches, however you can change
the vertical ruler units to picas, millimeters, and ciceros:

Setting the
Graphics
Display

•

The Preferences dialog box allows you to choose the Graphic
Display options for your placed graphics:

Gray out – Can be useful if you want to concentrate on the text
elements in your publication and speed your screen redraw.
Unfortunately, you cannot selectively gray out graphics. It’s all or
nothing. With advent layers this option might be obsolete. If you want
to hide graphics, place them on their own layer and hide that layer as
needed.
Standard – The view you work in most of the time. Standard view
enables your screen to redraw faster by displaying the low-resolution
screen-only image. As long as your links are up to date, the lowresolution image is only for the screen. When you print, the real
graphic is sent to the printer for high- resolution output. You can
adjust the resolution PageMaker uses for Standard display in the More
Preferences dialog box.
High-resolution – Will draw the screen image from the actual graphic
file, be it embedded or linked. If your graphic file is more than a few
megabytes in size, this process can take an eternity.
Note: For best print quality, use the High Resolution setting when
you are ready to print.
Setting the
Control
Palette

•

The Control palette settings allow you to make adjustments to how
the Horizontal and Vertical nudges, and the ‘Snap to’ constraints
will work in the Control palette. The Control palette is simply a
compact and convenient way of making changes to your publication:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Introduction to PageMaker

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Setting the
Save Option

•

The Save option allows you to select the saving option appropriate for
you. The default setting is Faster:

Applying
Guides

•

You can determine whether the Guides appear in front of or behind
objects. Click the Guides radio button for Front or Back:

•

You can also change the location of the guides with out going to the
General Preferences dialog box, to do this:
From the main menu, choose the View > Send Guides to Back
OR choose the View > Bring Guides to Front
Note: To select an object that is overlapped by a guide, press the Ctrl
key while clicking the object. It is best to keep all your guides in front.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Introduction to PageMaker

7
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 5

Use Publication files?
Use Template files?
Use General Preferences?
Set the Measurement In?
Set the Vertical ruler?
Set the Graphics Display?
Set the Control Palette?
Set the Save Options?
Apply Guides?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PageMaker Interface

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker Interface
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Use the PageMaker Environment
Use Blank Pages
Use the Pasteboard
Use the Toolbox
Use the Colors Palette
Use the Control Palette
Use the Character View
Use the Paragraph View
Use the Object View
Use Rulers
Use the Zero Point Option
Use Guides
Apply the Snap to Option

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PageMaker Interface

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Work Environment

Work Environment
•

The PageMaker
environment will
display a New
Publication window, a
Blank Page, a Master
Page, and Current
Page icons, horizontal
and vertical Scroll
Bars, Rulers, the
Control palette, the
Toolbox, and other
palettes.

Using the
PageMaker
Environment

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 6

The PageMaker environment will display a New Publication window,
a Blank Page, a Master Page, and Current Page icons, horizontal
and vertical Scroll Bars, Rulers, the Control palette, the Toolbox,
and other palettes such as Styles, Colors, Layers, Master Pages,
and Hyperlinks:

Note: Palettes always display in front of your work window, and
remain opened until you close them.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PageMaker Interface

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Using Blank
Pages

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

When starting with a new document, you will see a blank page
with/without Margin Guides set to a size specified in the Page Setup
dialog box. A rectangle with a black key line and a drop shadow
represents the page. If you set page margins for your page they will
be represented by a bright magenta colored keyline which will be
smaller than your page size, and two darker colored Column Guides
on the left and right side of the page:

Note: If you set all of your page margins to zero, the margin guides
and column guides will become the keyline of the page.
Using the
Pasteboard

•

The Pasteboard is the non-printing area outside the blank page. The
function of the pasteboard in PageMaker is the same as the traditional
pasteboard, simply select objects and move them onto the pasteboard
for use on other pages. You can leave items on the pasteboard until
you are ready to use them:

Note: If you go to another page in your document, the items on the
pasteboard will still stay in place, and they will always be visible unless
you delete them.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PageMaker Interface

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Toolbox

•

The PageMaker Toolbox
enables you to access the
basic tools you need to
perform various actions in
the publication window.

Using the
Toolbox

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 7

The PageMaker Tool palette enables you to access the basic tools
you need to perform various actions in the publication window:

Note: For more information on the Tool Palette, see the Basic Tools
chapter.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PageMaker Interface

13
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Colors Palette

Colors Palette
•

•

The Colors palette is used
to make quick color
changes to your
publication.
By default every Colors
palette must contain the
following colors : None,
Paper, Black, and
Registration.

Using the
Colors
Palette

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 8

From the main menu, choose Window > Show Colors Palette

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PageMaker Interface

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

The Colors palette contains the following colors by default: None,
Paper, Black, and Registration.
None: Apply this color to objects you want to be transparent-that is
when you want the color of a background object to show through the
selected object.
Paper: This is the color of the paper you are working on; technically, it
is no ink at all.
Black: This is the default color for text.
Registration: This is not really a color at all, but more of a
designation, used when you are printing separations
Process colors: These are cyan, magenta, and yellow. These colors
are denoted by the process colors symbol .
RGB colors: These are red, green, and blue, denoted by the RGB
symbol .

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PageMaker Interface

15
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Control Palette

Control Palette
Empty Control Palette

•

The Control palette
gives you a one-stop
shop, enabling you to
change several
formatting options in
one place rather than
making repeat trips to
the Type menu.

Character Control Palette

Paragraph Control Palette

Object Control Palette

Using the
Control
Palette

•
•

Using the
Character
View

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 9

The Control palette gives you a one-stop shop, enabling you to
change several formatting options in one place rather than making
repeat trips to the Type menu.
From the main menu, choose Window > Show Control Palette
OR press the Ctrl + ‘ key combination

•

The X and Y coordinates displays the horizontal and vertical
distances of the selected object from the current zero point.

•

In the Character View, click one of the font options in the Control
palette. You can view the Characters by using the toggling button to
choose the Apply button, Type style, Case, Position, Type Size,
Leading, Expert tracking, Horizontal Scale, Kerning, and Baseline
Shift:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PageMaker Interface

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the
Paragraph
View

•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

The Paragraph View of the Control palette offers many of the same
options as the Character View. Such as, Apply button,
Character/Paragraph buttons Alignment, Style, Cursor position
indicator, First line indent, Right indent, Left indent, Add space above
paragraph, Grid options, Add space after paragraph:

Note: To toggle between the character and paragraph views of the
Control palette, press the Ctrl + Shift + ‘ key combination.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PageMaker Interface

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Using the
Object View

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

When drawing/selecting objects, the Control palette will change
depending on the object type:

Apply button: Apply changes to objects using numeric values you
enter.
Proxy: Represents the selected object. Click to set a reference point,
or the point you are manipulating on the object.
Nudge buttons: Use to resize, click to move, or transform an object
incrementally. Press Shift while nudging to increase the nudge
increment by ten.
Position pointer: Displays the X and Y coordinate values of the
reference point or pointer, relative to the current rulers.
Sizing options: Specifies the width and height of the selected object
or cropping rectangle. Nudge amount 0.01 inches.
Percent scaling option: Specifies the percentage change from the
original size.
Scaling option: Click to use scaling option to resize an imported
graphic.
Cropping option: Click to use the cropping tool to crop imported
graphics.
Proportional-scaling option: Specifies whether you change an
object’s height or width independently, or maintaining its original
proportions.
Printer-resolution-scaling option: Constrains the scaling of
imported 1-bit bitmap graphics so that they are compatible with the
target printer specified in the Document Setup dialog box.
Skewing options: Skews objects horizontally –85 to 85 degrees in
relation to the selected reference point.
Rotating option: Rotates the object around the reference point.
Horizontal reflecting point: Reflect the object vertically, and then
rotate the object 180 degrees so it appears to be reflected horizontally.
Vertical-reflecting button: Reflects the object vertically.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PageMaker Interface

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Rulers/Guides

Rulers/Guides
•

Rulers can be toggled on
and off by choosing View >
Show/Hide Rulers
OR by pressing the Ctrl + R
key combination.

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 10

Using Rulers

•

Rulers can be toggled on and off by choosing View > Show/Hide
Rulers
OR by pressing the Ctrl + R key combination. Most of the time you
will need them on. You can change the measurement system the
ruler displays by going to the General Preferences.

To Change the
Ruler
Measurements

•

From the main menu, choose File > Preferences > General
OR press the Ctrl + K key combination:

Using the
Zero Point
Option

•

The Zero Point is the reference point by which you can refer to an
object’s location on the page or pasteboard. Unless you change it, the
zero point reflects the top left of your page or, if you are working with
facing pages, the point at which the two pages meet:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PageMaker Interface

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using Guides

•

Guides are used to help you place objects precisely on your page.
These ruler guides help you align objects along the same plane, and
like the margin and column guides, they do not print:

To add a
Guide

•

Drag a guide from the left or the top ruler onto the page:

To remove a
Guide

•

Grab and drag a guide outside of the work area.
Note: You can have up to 120 ruler guides per page.

Applying the
Snap to
Option

•
•

When the Snap to Guides option is on choose View > Snap to
Guides
OR press the Ctrl + Shift + ; key combination.
You may find the movement of an object constrained by the snapping,
preventing you from moving it incrementally nearer to a guide. In such
cases, you should turn off Snap to Guides:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PageMaker Interface

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 11

Use the PageMaker Environment?
Use Blank Pages?
Use the Pasteboard?
Use the Toolbox?
Use the Colors Palette?
Use the Control Palette?
Use the Character View?
Use the Paragraph View?
Use the Object View?
Use Rulers?
Use the Zero Point Option?
Use Guides?
Apply the Snap to Option?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Documents

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Documents
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Create New Documents
Use the Document Setup dialog box
Apply Page Size
Apply Dimensions
Apply Orientation
Apply Options
Apply Number of Pages
Apply Start Page #
Apply the Margins
Change the Document Setup
Setup Master Pages
Use the Save and Save As commands
Use the Open command
Use the Open As option
Use the Cannot Find dialog box
Use the Close command

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Documents

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

New Documents

•

Creating a New Document
allows you to set up the
publication page with
specified settings.
You can define such things
as the size of the page, the
size of the margins, and
even the orientation of the
page.

Creating New
Documents

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 12

Creating a New Document allows you to set up the publication page
with specified settings. You can define such things as the size of the
page, the size of the margins, and even the orientation of the page.
From the main menu, choose File > New to create a new document:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Documents

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Using the
Document
Setup dialog
box

Applying
Page Size

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

The Document Setup dialog box allows you to define various
characteristics of your document such as the page size, number of
pages, and page-numbering:

•

Click the Page Size pop-up menu to see the standard page sizes
provided:

Note: Standard screen sizes for creating online publications are
expressed in pixels.
Applying
Dimensions

•

You can use whatever page Dimensions you like-up to a maximum
page size of 42 x 42 inches. To use a non-standard page size, type in
the dimensions and the Page Size option changes to Custom:

Note: Consider your page dimensions before you choose a custom
page size for your publication. You can only have one page size per
publication
Applying
Orientation

•

If you change the Orientation from tall (also known as portrait) to wide
(landscape), the dimensions will switch:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Documents

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Applying
Options

•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

The Options allow you to set your page setup:
Double-sided – When checked will cause the left and right margins
to become the inside and outside. Select this option when creating
publications printed on both sides of the page, a magazine,
newsletter, or book.
Facing Pages – When checked will allow you to view your pages as
spreads-with the even numbered pages on the left, and the oddnumbered pages on the right:

Applying
Number of
Pages

•

The Number of Pages field allows you to determine the number of
pages in your publication. If you don’t yet know how many pages you
need, it’s easy to insert and remove pages while your publication is in
progress:

Applying
Start Page #

•

The Start Page # field allows you to type in where you want page
numbering to begin. If you choose an even number, your first page is
a left page:

Applying the
Margins

•

Set the values in the Margins sections to determine the margins for
the Document page:

Note: Margins are applied to the document master page.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Documents

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Changing the
Document
Setup

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Although the Change Setup dialog box appears when you choose
File > New to create a new publication, you can modify a publication's
Document Setup at any point in your work by choosing File >
Document Setup while the publication is active:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Documents

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Master Pages

•

The Master Page
typically contains the
basic design elements
of a page, such as
headers and footers,
and page numbers.

Setting Up
Master Pages

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 13

The Master Page typically contains the basic design elements of a
page, such as headers and footers, and page numbers. The contents
of the Master Page will apply to all of the pages in the publication
unless you specify otherwise. You can create, modify, and delete
objects on master pages just like any other page. Master pages also
contain column guides, ruler guides, and margin guides. Each
publication can have an unlimited number of Master Pages.
Every publication contains a Document-Master page or a DocumentMaster page spread, in the case of publications that include facing
pages. You cannot rename or remove these Master Pages from the
publication.
The Master icon is located at the bottom left of the publication window.
An icon containing the letters L (for left) and R (for right) mark the
master page icon for facing pages or spreads:

In the case of single pages an icon containing the letter R marks a
single-sided publication. Click the icon to turn to the master applied to
the current publication page:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Documents

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

To Display
the Master
Page content

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

From the main menu, choose View > Display Master Page Items:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Documents

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Saving Documents

•

The Save and Save As
commands allow you to
store your active
publication.
To save your publication,
choose File > Save
OR press the Ctrl + S key
combination.

Using the
Save and
Save As
commands

•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 14

The Save and Save As commands allow you to store your active
publication.
To save your publication:
From the main menu, choose File > Save
OR press the Ctrl + S key combination.
To use the save as method:
From the main menu, choose File > Save As
OR press the Shift + Ctrl + S key combination:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Documents

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

When you Save your publication for the first time or if you choose the
Save As command, you will see the Save Publication dialog box. In
this dialog box, you can choose the location you would like to save you
publication, crate a name to represent your publication and choose the
file type you would like the publication to save as:

Note: One of the most practical habits you can develop is to save your
PageMaker publication often. When you save a publication, your File
Name ensures that it remains stored in your computer even if there is
a power failure or system crash. To avoid the frustration of rebuilding
a lost publication, save your work regularly.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Documents

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

File Types

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

The Save as type drop down list allows you to choose how you want
to save your publication:

•

The Publication file type will save your publication as a native
PageMaker 6.5 file. The file extension will be .P65:

•

The Template file type will save your publication as a template. The
file extension will be .T65:

•

The A copy in 6.0 format file type will save you publication as a
PageMaker 6.0 version so that you may open your publication in
PageMaker 6.0 or higher. The DOS extension will be .PM6:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Documents

31
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Opening Documents

•

The Open command allows
you to open a previously
saved publication.
To Open a publication
choose File > Open
OR press the Ctrl + O key
combination.

Using the
Open
command

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 15

The Open command allows you to open a previously saved
publication.
From the main menu, choose File > Open
OR press the Ctrl + O key combination:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Documents

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

When you are opening up a publication you will see the Open
Publication dialog box. This dialog box allows you to navigate around
your hard drive to locate PageMaker files:

Note: By default PageMaker Files are the only file types that will be
available to you in the Open Publication dialog box. The explorer
window will only display PageMaker 6.0 – 6.5 Publication and
Template files. If you will like to try and open another file type, you
will have to select the All Files option from the Files of Type drop
down list.
Using the
Open As
option

•

Once you have found the file you would like to open, you have a
choice of how you would like to open the files, as PageMaker
publication or template file. By default it opens the original publication
or a copy of the template file:

•

Use the File > Open command to open the original version or a copy
of a PageMaker 6.5 publication or template. PageMaker keeps track
of the last eight publications you opened and saved, and lists these
when you choose File > Recent Publications.
When you select a template or a PageMaker 4.0-6.01 publication,
PageMaker automatically selects Copy. To open the original of a
template instead, click Original. (The Original option is not available
for a PageMaker 4.0-6.01 publication.)

•

PANOSE
Font
Matching

•

After you select a publication to open, the fonts used in the publication
are matched with those available in your computer. If a font used in
the selected publication isn't available, PageMaker displays the
PANOSE Font Matching dialog box to allow you to select available
fonts to substitute for the missing fonts. For more information about
substituting fonts, refer to Font Substitution.

Using the
Cannot Find
dialog box

•

If you are opening a publication that has links to external text or
graphics files, you will see a Cannot Find dialog box if a file cannot be
located. Use this dialog box to locate the file or to tell PageMaker to
ignore the link. See Importing, Linking, and Exporting, for more
information.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Documents

33
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Closing Documents

•

Close command,
closes the active
publication.

Using the
Close
command

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 16

From the main menu, choose File > Close to close the active
publication:

Note: To close all open publications at once, press the Shift key as
you select the Close command from the file menu.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Documents

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 17

Create New Documents?
Use the Document Setup dialog box?
Apply Page Size?
Apply Dimensions?
Apply Orientation?
Apply Options?
Apply Number of Pages?
Apply Start Page #?
Apply the Margins?
Change the Document Setup?
Setup Master Pages?
Use the Save and Save As commands?
Use the Open command?
Use the Open As option?
Use the Cannot Find dialog box?
Use the Close command?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Tools

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Tools
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Use the Pointer Tool
Use the Text Tool
Use the Rotating Tool
Use the Cropping Tool
Use Drawing Tools
Use the Line Tool
Use the Constrained Line Tool
Use the Rectangle Tool
Use the Rectangle Frame Tool
Use the Ellipse Tool
Use the Ellipse Frame Tool
Use the Polygon Tool
Use the Polygon Frame Tool
Use Visual Tools
Use the Hand Tool
Use the Zoom Tool
Use the Preferences dialog box
Use the Character Specifications dialog box
Use the Custom Stroke dialog box
Use the Rounded Corners dialog box
Use the Fill and Stroke dialog box
Use the Frame Options dialog box
Use the Polygon Settings dialog box

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Tools

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Basic Tools

Basic Tools
•

•

The Pointer tool is used to select,
move, and resize text objects and
graphics.
The Text tool is used to create text
blocks and text frames, select, and
edit text.
The Rotation tool is used to select
and rotate text objects and
graphics.
The Cropping tool is used to crop
parts of the graphic that you do not
want to print.

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 18

Using the
Pointer Tool

•

The Pointer tool is used to select, move, and resize text
objects and graphics:

Using the
Text Tool

•

The Text tool is used to create text blocks and text
frames, select, and edit text:

Using the
Rotating Tool

•

The Rotation tool is used to select and rotate text
objects and graphics:

Using the
Cropping
Tool

•

When importing a graphic from another program or
publication, you can use the Cropping tool to crop parts
of the graphic that you do not want to print by adjusting
the size of its surrounding bounding box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Tools

37
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Drawing Tools

•

The Drawing tools allow
you to create simple
graphics (or frames to hold
text or imported graphics)
to which you can apply a
stroke and or fill.

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 19

Using
Drawing
Tools

•

The Drawing tools allow you to create simple graphics (or frames to
hold text or imported graphics) to which you can apply a stroke and or
fill. If necessary, choose Window > Show Tools to display the
Toolbox:

Using the
Line Tool

•

The Line tool is used to draw lines at any angle:

Using the
Constrained
Line Tool

•

The Constrained Line tool is used to draw straight lines or lines at 45degree angles:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Tools

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the
Rectangle
Tool

•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

The Rectangle tool is used to draw rectangles, or by holding down the
Shift key allows you to draw squares. You can change the corner
radius of the rectangle before it is drawn by double clicking the
rectangle tool to display the Rounded Corners dialog box:

Note: You can change the corners of the rectangle after it has been
drawn, by choosing the Element > Rounded Corner command.
Using the
Rectangle
Frame Tool

•

The Rectangle Frame tool is used the same way as the rectangle
tool; however, this tool allows you to place text or graphics within the
frame:

Using the
Ellipse Tool

•

The Ellipse tool is used to draw ellipses, or by holding down the Shift
key allows you to draw circles:

Using the
Ellipse Frame
Tool

•

The Ellipse Frame tool is used the same way as the ellipse tool;
however, this tool allows you to place text or graphics within the frame:

Using the
Polygon Tool

•

The Polygon tool is used to draw customized or preset polygon
shapes.
To change the preset shape you will be drawing, double click the
polygon tool to display the Polygon Settings dialog box.
Holding down the Shift key allows you to constrain the length and
width of the shape, or the line segment.
After you draw a shape, you can add, move, or delete its vertices and
line segments, by double clicking the shape.
From the main menu, choose the Element > Polygon Settings
command to change shapes drawn with the polygon presets:

•
•
•
•

Note: If you save your document, as a PageMaker 6.0 publication,
when reopened in Version 6.0, any irregular polygons you create
cannot be edited as far as changing the vertices and line segments,
only resized.
Using the
Polygon
Frame Tool

•

The Polygon Frame tool is used the same way as the Polygon tool;
however, this tool allows you to place text or graphics within the frame:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Tools

39
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Visual Tools

•

The Visual tools allow you
to zoom in and out of or
navigate around your
publication or Pasteboard.
These tools can be used on
their own or in conjunction
with other tools by using
the keyboard shortcut.

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 20

Using Visual
Tools

•

The Visual tools allow you to zoom in and out of or navigate around
your publication or Pasteboard. These tools can be used on their own
or in conjunction with other tools by using the keyboard shortcut:

Using the
Hand Tool

•

The Hand tool is used to move your page around within your
publication window or (in the Advanced Level) to preview and test
hyperlinks:

To move your
page

•
•
•

Select the Hand tool.
Click on the page and drag the page to the desired location.
Release the mouse.

Using the
Zoom Tool

•

The Zoom tool allows you to magnify or reduce the display of any area
in your publication. The magnification limits are between 25% and
400%:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Tools

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

To magnify
part of a page
by dragging

•
•

Select the Zoom tool.
Click and drag to draw a marquee around the area you want to
magnify.

To zoom in
and out while
using another
tool

•

Press the Ctrl + Spacebar key combination to zoom in,
OR press the Ctrl + Spacebar + Alt key combination to zoom out.
Click to zoom in or out, or drag to select an area you want to zoom in
on.

•

Note: You can also double-click the Zoom tool to jump to Actual Size,
or press the Alt key as you double-click the Zoom tool to go to Fit in
Window view.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Tools

41
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Modifying Tools

Modifying Tools
•

Double-clicking some
of the tools will display
various dialog boxes.

Using the
Preferences
dialog box

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 21

Double-clicking the Pointer tool will display the Preferences dialog
box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Tools

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the
Character
Specification
s dialog box

•

Double-clicking the Text tool will display the Character
Specifications dialog box:

•

The Character Specifications dialog box will allow you to control the
font, size, and other attributes of a selected range of text, part of the
default, or part of a style.
Character attributes determine how text looks on the page. Size,
typeface, and character width (or horizontal scale) are a few of the
attributes that you can set in PageMaker.

•

Using the
Custom
Stroke dialog
box

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

Double-clicking the Line tools will display the Custom Stroke dialog
box:

•

You can use the Custom Stroke dialog box to apply fill and stroke for
drawn rectangles, polygons, or ellipses (including frames). Specify
whether the stroke or fill of the object should overprint; and also set an
object-level tint for either the stroke or the fill.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Tools

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Using the
Rounded
Corners
dialog box

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Double-clicking the Rectangle tool will display the Rounded Corners
dialog box:

•

The Rounded Corners dialog box allows you to select the shape of
corners when a PageMaker-drawn box is selected.
After you create a rectangle, you can change the shape of its corners.
After you create a polygon, you can add, move, or delete its vertices
and line segments.
For regular polygons only (created by dragging the polygon tool), you
can also use the Element > Polygon Settings command to change
the number of sides it has, and its inset value (the angle at which the
sides point toward the center of the shape).

•
•
•

Note: With no object selected, the chosen setting becomes the default
for PageMaker-drawn boxes. Unavailable if the selected object is not
a box drawn in PageMaker.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Tools

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the Fill
and Stroke
dialog box

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

Double-clicking the Ellipse tool will display the Fill and Stroke dialog
box:

•

You can modify objects a number of ways with Fill and Strokes. For
example, you can resize, rotate, and add color to objects. For objects
drawn with PageMaker drawing tools, you can also change stroke (the
width of lines drawn with the drawing tools, and the width of borders
around rectangles, ellipses, and polygons), as well as stroke and fill
patterns.
Note: Changes you make to color attributes do not affect an object if
Reverse is selected from the Stroke drop-down menu, or if Paper is
selected from the Fill drop-down menu.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Tools

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Using the
Frame
Options
dialog box

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Double-clicking the Frame tools will display the Frame Options dialog
box:

•

The Frame Options dialog box allows you to specify alignment and
offset for text or graphics within a frame. This is unavailable if a frame
is not selected.
Note: If you don't want a border around the frame, select the frame,
and choose Element > Stroke > None. A non-printing, light-gray
border appears around the frame. If you want to hide the non-printing
border, choose View > Hide Guides.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Tools

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the
Polygon
Settings
dialog box

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

Double-clicking the Polygon tools will display the Polygon Settings
dialog box:

•

The Polygon Settings dialog box allows you to change the shape of
polygons. You can change the number of sides (up to 100) and the
degree to which the sides are inset to form a star. With no object
selected, the chosen setting becomes the default for PageMakerdrawn polygons. This is unavailable if the selected object is not a
polygon drawn in PageMaker.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Tools

47
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 22

Use the Pointer Tool?
Use the Text Tool?
Use the Rotating Tool?
Use the Cropping Tool?
Use Drawing Tools?
Use the Line Tool?
Use the Constrained Line Tool?
Use the Rectangle Tool?
Use the Rectangle Frame Tool?
Use the Ellipse Tool?
Use the Ellipse Frame Tool?
Use the Polygon Tool?
Use the Polygon Frame Tool?
Use Visual Tools?
Use the Hand Tool?
Use the Zoom Tool?
Use the Preferences dialog box?
Use the Character Specifications dialog box?
Use the Custom Stroke dialog box?
Use the Rounded Corners dialog box?
Use the Fill and Stroke dialog box?
Use the Frame Options dialog box?
Use the Polygon Settings dialog box?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Colors and Fills

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Colors and Fills
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Use the Define Colors dialog box
Create Colors
Edit Colors
Remove Colors
Use the Color Options dialog box
Apply a Color Name
Apply Color Type
Apply a Color Model
Apply a Color Field
Preview Colors
Use the Stroke Button
Use the Fill Button
Use the Both Button
Apply the Tint Percentage
Use the Color Icon
Use the Color Model Icon
Use the Color Type Icon
Use the EPS Color Icon
Use the Color-Level Tint Icon
Use the CMS Display
Use the New Color Button
Use the Trash Button

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Colors and Fills

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Custom Colors

•

You can create custom
colors using the Define
Colors dialog box.
To open the Define
Colors dialog box,
choose Utilities > Define
Colors.

•

Using the
Define Colors
dialog box

•

To open the Define Colors
dialog box, choose Utilities
> Define Colors:

•

The Define Colors dialog
box allows you to create,
edit and rename the colors
for use in your publication:

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 23

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Colors and Fills

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Creating
Colors

•

Creating new Spot and Process colors is simple. To create a New
Color, select the New button to open the Color Options dialog box:

Editing
Colors

•

When you Edit Colors, PageMaker will automatically update any
objects that the color was applied to:

Note: You can edit the definition of a Spot color imported with an EPS
graphic, but you cannot change its name or its Overprint setting.
Removing
Colors

•

When you Remove Color, PageMaker will apply the color Black to
any text or graphic to which the color you removed was applied. Tints
that used the removed color also change to tints of Black. You can
remove a color from a PageMaker-drawn graphic, and remove a color
from the active publication.
To remove all the colors defined but not being used, from the active
publication, select the Remove Unused button:

Note: You cannot remove the colors None, Paper, Black, and
Registration. Also note that you can remove colors imported with an
EPS graphic only if the EPS graphic itself has been deleted from the
publication.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Colors and Fills

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Color Options Dialog Box

•

To select a color or choose
a color model (such as
RGB), go to the Color
Options dialog box by
choosing Utilities > Define
Color and clicking the New
button.

Using the
Color
Options
dialog box

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 24

To select a color or choose a color model (such as RGB), go to the
Color Options dialog box by choosing Utilities > Define Color and
clicking the New button:

Note: You can also click the New Color icon at the bottom of the
Colors palette to open the Color Options dialog box.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Colors and Fills

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Applying a
Color Name

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Cyan, black, and yellow are just a few of the colors to name when
trying to define a color in the color Name field. Black is the default
color:

Note: It is good idea to include the different color values you used to
create the color, rather than just giving the color a creative name. This
will help you keep track of how the color was created without always
having to keep going to the Color Options dialog box. If creating a
blue color using 100% cyan and 75% magenta, the color would be
something like: Blue C100, M75. If the value of a color is 0% you do
not need to include in the name.
Applying
Color Type

•

Color Type can be changed to Spot, Process, or Tint:

Spot – Use when you do not want the color to print as a separation or
when you want to use Pantone colors. Spot colors are often
preferred as a way to use color without drastically increasing printing
cost.
Process – Use in conjunction with the CYMK color model. Process
colors are colors that you want to separate when they are printed.
Tint – Use when you want to use tints of a color. You can choose
values of 0 – 100%. The Color Model field will change to a Base
Color field when you select the Tint color type:

Note: You cannot create a tint of a color that you are currently editing;
if you try you will get a warning:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Colors and Fills

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Applying a
Color Model

•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

The Color Model can be changed to CMYK, RGB or HLS:

Note: You can use any of the models to create a process color, but
PageMaker will convert those values to the approximate CMYK values
when you print separations or color composites. To control the final
printed colors in your publication, use the CMYK model to specify
process colors.
Applying a
Color Field

•

In the Color fields, specify the percentages of a color to create colors,
to increase or decrease how much color is being used, type the
number in values of 0 – 100% or use the slider bar.
CMYK Color fields:

RGB Color fields:

Previewing
Colors

•

The Color Preview displays a sample of the chosen colors you are
using and a sample of how the color has been modified:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Colors and Fills

55
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Colors Palette

Colors Palette
Fill Button

Stroke Button

Tint Drop down list

Both Button
Color Model Icon

Color Type Icon
Color Icon

CMS Color Model
and Ink Value

Trash Icon
Create New color Icon

Using the
Stroke Button

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 25

The Stroke button specifies the line weight and pattern for the
rectangle, ellipse, or polygon tool. You can specify other line weights
in one-tenth of a point, up to 800 points:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Colors and Fills

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the Fill
Button

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

The Fill button lets you specify a fill or pattern when drawing a
rectangle, ellipse, or polygon:

•

To select a pattern fill choose the Element > Fill command:

Note: A pattern fill can also be applied to a selected box or oval. With
the exception of None color, the patterns are opaque, hiding whatever
is behind them.
Using the
Both Button

•

The Both button allows you to colorize the stroke, and the fill at the
same time with the same color:

Applying the
Tint
Percentage

•

The Tint Percentage pop-up menu in the Colors palette determines
the percentage of the base color to apply to an object. The advantage
of this kind of tint is it can be applied instantly:

Using the
Color Icon

•

The Color icon gives you a swatch to indicate how the color will look
when it is applied to an object:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Colors and Fills

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Using the
Color Model
Icon

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

The Color Model icon represents the colors model set in the Color
Options dialog box.
CMYK Color Model:
RGB Color Model:
HLS Color Model:

Using the
Color Type
Icon

•

The Color Type icon indicates the color types set in the Color
Options dialog box.
Process Color icon:
Spot Color icon:

Using the
EPS Color
Icon

•

EPS Color icon appears when you place EPS graphics containing
Process or Spot colors into the publication:

Using the
Color-Level
Tint Icon

•

Color-level Tint icon indicates that the color you are looking at is
using a Color-level tint of a color found in your color list:

Using the
CMS Display

•

CMS Display indicates the Color Model, Ink value, and/or Tint Value
of a selected color:

Using the
New Color
Button

•

The New Color button allows you to quickly choose new colors from
the palette:

Using the
Trash Button

•

The Trash button offers a quick and convenient way of deleting colors:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Colors and Fills

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 26

Use the Define Colors dialog box?
Create Colors?
Edit Colors?
Remove Colors?
Use the Color Options dialog box?
Apply a Color Name?
Apply Color Type?
Apply a Color Model?
Apply a Color Field?
Preview Colors?
Use the Stroke Button?
Use the Fill Button?
Use the Both Button?
Apply the Tint Percentage?
Use the Color Icon?
Use the Color Model Icon?
Use the Color Type Icon?
Use the EPS Color Icon?
Use the Color-Level Tint Icon?
Use the CMS Display?
Use the New Color Button?
Use the Trash Button?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Text
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Use Text Blocks
Use Text Frames
Input text into a Text Block
Input text into a Text Frame
Use the Place dialog box
Choose File Name
Choose File Types
Set Place
Set Options
Highlight text
Add and Remove text
Copy, Cut and Paste text
Use the Character View
Use the Paragraph View
Use the Character Specifications dialog box
Choose Font Names
Set Font Size
Set Leading
Set Horizontal Scale
Set text Color
Set Color Tint
Set Type Style
Set Position
Set Case
Set Track
Set Line End

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Blocks Vs. Frames

Blocks Vs. Frames
•

A Text Block is one of two
ways in which PageMaker
allows you to add Text to
your publication.
A Frame becomes a Text
Frame or a Graphics Frame
depending on the content
you add into it.

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 27

Using Text
Blocks

A Text Block is one of two ways in which PageMaker allows you to add
Text to your publication. The height or width of a Text Block will change
as you add or remove text.

To Create a
Text Block

•
•

Select the text tool from the tools palette.
Click and drag the mouse to the desired size:

•

Enter in the desired text.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

To Resize a
Text Block

Overset Text
Icon

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•
•

Select the Pointer Tool from the tools Palette.
Select the Text block you would like to resize:

•

Select the text block handle:

•

Click and drag the handle to the new desired size:

•

When resizing a Text Block you have to click and then drag the text
block handle from one of its corner points to the new desired size of
the text block. If you make the text block smaller than it original size
you will cause the text to become overset. If the text becomes
overset, an Overset Text icon will indicate that not all of the text fit
inside the new text block size:

Note: A text block must be rectangular; and if it is empty it will
disappear. It is also not possible to apply a stroke or fill to a text block.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using Text
Frames

To Create a
Text Frame

•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

A Frame becomes a Text Frame or a Graphics Frame depending on
the content you add into it. Once you add a graphic to a new frame,
the frame becomes a graphic frame and you cannot include text into
the frame, unless you first delete or detach the graphic from the frame.
A Text Frame functions in much the same way as the Text block, but
unlike the text block the text frame the height or width will not change
as you add or remove text. Also unlike the text block, empty text
frames will not disappear and It is possible to apply strokes or fills to
text frames:

•
•

Select a Frame Tool.
Click and drag the mouse to the desired size:

•
•

Select the text tool from the tools palette.
Place the mouse inside of the frame and click the mouse button:

•

Enter in the desired text.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

To Resize a
Text Frame

Overset Text
Icon

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•
•

Select the Pointer Tool from the tools palette.
Select the Text Frame you would like to resize:

•

Select the Text Frame handle:

•

Click and drag the handle to the new desired size:

•

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Inputting Text

•

To Input Text into a
Text Block.

•

To Input Text into a
Text Frame.

Inputting text
into a Text
Block

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 28

•

Create a text block to the desired size:

•

You will see a flashing curser appear on the screen, you can begin to
enter in your desired text:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Inputting text
into a Text
Frame

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Create your text frame to the desired size:

•

With the text tool selected place the cursor inside of the frame:

•

Click the mouse button:

•

Enter in the desired text:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Placing Text

Placing Text
•

•

The Place Dialog Box
allows you to import text
from various sources.
PageMaker can import
such files as Spreadsheet
or Database documents,
Word-Processed
documents, another
PageMaker Story files,
ASCII text files, Rich Text
files and HTML files.

Using the
Place dialog
box

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 29

To open the Place dialog box:
From the main menu, choose File > Place
OR press the Ctrl + D key combination:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

The Place dialog box allows you to import text (and graphics) from
various sources. PageMaker can import such files as Spreadsheet or
Database documents, Word-Processed documents, another
PageMaker Story files, ASCII text files, Rich Text files and HTML
files. The files you can place depend in part on the import filters you
have installed:

•

When you open a text file to be placed into your publication, your
mouse pointer will become a Loaded Text Icon:

Note: If you try to place a file that PageMaker does not have a filter
installed for, you will get a Caution dialog box, which will allow you to
use other installed filters to try and open the file:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Choosing File
Name

•

The File Name field is where you enter in the name of the text file you
are looking for. You can also use the Explorer window to locate your
file:

Choosing File
Types

•

The Files of Type drop-down list allows you to decide which kinds of
files you want to place into your PageMaker publications:

Note: Depending on the import filter you have installed you will be
able to place files from other PageMaker publications, Wordprocessing applications (WordPerfect, Microsoft Word, and Microsoft
Works), HTML files, Text or Table editors or any application that can
export text in ASCII format, Spreadsheet files from Excel or Lotus 1-23 formats, and Database files (dBASE and dBASE-compatible
applications).
Kind field

•

The Kind field tells you the type of document is being chosen to place,
whether it’s Microsoft application Document, or other Text Document:

Size field

•

The Size field informs you of how large the file size is. The file size is
important in cases where you need to control the file size of your
publication:

Last Modified
field

•

The Last Modified field allows you to see the date and time of when
the selected file was last modified:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Setting Place

•

Place options radio buttons allow you to determine how the text you
are importing will be placed into your publication:

•

The As New Story option adds the placed file as a new story,
separate from the existing stories in your publication.
The Replacing Entire Story option will delete a selected story from
your publication and replaces it with the new one you have select to
place. PageMaker will also preserve the position, size, and orientation
text object you are replacing.
The Inserting Text option will place the placed text at the insertion
point, without deleting the existing text.
The Replacing Selected Text option will delete text, which you have
selected in your publication, and replace it with the new text you have
selected to place.

•

•
•

Setting
Options

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

The Options settings allow you to determine how the text you are
importing will behave when it is being placed:

•

The Retain Format option allows you to retain any character or
paragraph formatting and the style sheet when the text is imported, if
the file contains one:

•

The Convert Quotes option converts the quotation marks and
apostrophes of the selected file into typographer's quotation marks
and apostrophes:

•

The Read Tags option allows you to apply paragraph styles to text
when it is placed:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Text-Only
Import Filters

•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

The Text-Only Import filters allow you to further adjust how the
imported text will appear when it is placed:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

71
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Editing Text

•

To edit text, first
you need to
Highlight text in
a Text Frame or
Text Block with
the mouse.
Then delete
existing text or
add new text.

To Highlight
Text in a Text
frame or text
block with
the mouse

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 30

•

Place the cursor at the appropriate end of the selected sentence:

•

Click and drag the cursor over the sentence, word or character you
would like to highlight:

•

Edit the highlighted text:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

To Highlight
Text in a Text
frame or text
block with
the keyboard

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Place the insertion point at the start of the range of characters you
want to highlight and click the mouse button.
Hold down Shift key.
Press the Arrow keys to extend the selection either one character at a
time by using the Right or Left arrow keys or one line at a time by
using the Up or Down arrow keys.
Note: You can also use the Keyboard and mouse together to
Highlight text. To do this:
Place the insertion point at the start of the range of characters you
want to highlight and click the mouse button.
Hold down Shift key.
Place the insertion point and the end of the range of characters you
would like to highlight and click the mouse button again to highlight the
desired range.

Adding and
Removing
text

•

Copying,
Cutting and
Pasting text

• The standard editing commands for moving information back and forth
from one location to another are the Cut, Copy, Paste, and Clear
commands.

To Copy Text

• Highlight the desired text.

•

Highlight the text you want to edit or place the insertion point at the
beginning of the location where you would like to add the text.
Enter in the new text information or press the Delete or Backspace
key to remove the unwanted text.

• From the main menu, choose Edit > Copy
OR press the Ctrl + C key combination

To Paste the
copied Text

• Place the cursor where you would like to Paste the Copied text,
• From the main menu, choose Edit > Paste
OR press the Ctrl + V key combination

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

To Cut Text
and Paste

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

• Highlight the desired text you would like to Cut.
• From the main menu, choose Edit > Cut
OR press the Ctrl + X key combination

• After you select the Cut command, the highlighted text will be removed.

To Paste the
cut Text

• Place the cursor where you want to paste the cut text:

• Paste the cut text where it is required:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Text Control Palette

Text Control Palette
•

•

In the Character View click
one of the font options in
the Control palette.
Use the toggling buttons to
choose the Type style,
Case, Position, Type Size,
Leading, Expert tracking,
Horizontal Scale, Kerning,
and Baseline Shift to
format the text.

Using the
Character
View

•

Using the
Paragraph
View

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 31

To display the Control palette, choose Window > Show Control
Palette. When you have selected the Text tool, Text Block or the Text
Frame, the Character View will be automatically displayed in the
Control palette.
In the Character View click one of the font options in the Control
palette. Use the toggling buttons to choose the Type style, Case,
Position, Type Size, Leading, Expert tracking, Horizontal Scale,
Kerning, and Baseline Shift:

To display the Control palette Paragraph setting, choose Window >
Show Control Palette to display the Control palette, then select the
Paragraph Icon to open display the Paragraph View.
The Paragraph View of the Control palette offers many of the same
options as the Character View. Such as, Apply button,
Character/Paragraph buttons Alignment, Style, Cursor position
indicator, First line indent, Right indent, Left indent, Add space above
paragraph, Grid options, Add space after paragraph:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Character Specifications Dialog Box

Character Specifications Dialog Box
•

•

The Character
Specifications dialog box
allows you to format the
text in your publication.
If you open the dialog box
without having any text
items selected, any
changes you make will
become the default setting
for the text you will use in
your publication.

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 32

Using the
Character
Specification
s dialog box

•

To display
the Character
Specification
s dialog box

• From the main menu, choose Text > Character

Choosing
Font Names

•

The Character Specifications Dialog Box allows you to format the
text in your publication. If you open the dialog box without having any
text items selected, any changes you make will become the default
setting for the text you will use in your publication.

OR press the Ctrl + T key combination:

The Font drop-down list allows you to select a font to use in your
publication or change an existing font:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Setting Font
Size

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

• The Size drop-down list allows you to specify the size of your type in
points:

Note: You can only select font sizes from 4 to 650 points in increments
of 0.1.
Setting
Leading

• The Leading drop-down list allows you to adjust the vertical space
between lines of text:

Note: Like letter and word spacing, the right amount of leading makes
text easier to read.
Setting
Horizontal
Scale

• The Horizontal Scale drop-down list allows you to adjust the width of
characters:

Note: You can specify a custom width anywhere from 5 to 250 percent.
Setting text
Color

• The Color drop-down list allows you to add color to text:

Note: You cannot apply the None color to text.
Setting Color
Tint

• The Tint drop-down list allows you to specify a tint of a color from the
Color drop-down list:

Note: If you apply a tint to the color Paper or Registration you see no
change take place.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Setting Type
Style

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

• Type Style checkboxes allow you to make various changes to the look
of your text. You have six options to choose from:

Normal: This option will return the text back to it’s original state (with
no Style applied to it):

Bold: This option will increase the weight of your text, making it thicker:

Italic: This option will give the text a slight slant:

Underline: This option will place a horizontal line under a character or
words:

Reverse: This option will make your text white. This is used to apply
text to a Black or dark background:

Strike thru: This option will draw a horizontal line through the text:

Note: You can also combine the options to further alter the look of you
text:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Setting
Position

•

The Position drop-down list allows you to set your text to Subscript,
Superscript or Normal (no position applied):

Setting Case

•

The Case drop-down list allows you to change the case of you text.
You have choice of Normal, All Caps or Small Caps:

Setting Track

•

The Track drop-down list allows you quickly increase or decrease the
space between words; you have a choice of Loose and Very Loose
to increase the space, Tight and Very Tight to decrease the space,
and Normal to use the default track setting:

Setting Line
End

• The Line End option allows you to control how a line of text brakes up
in a text block or text frame. You have a choice of Break or No Break.
The Break option is the default, but if you want to force a paragraph to
fit on one line, use the No Break option:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text

79
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 33

Use Text Blocks?
Use Text Frames?
Input text into a Text Block?
Use the Place dialog box?
Choose File Name?
Choose File Types?
Set Place?
Set Options?
Copy, Cut and Paste text?
Use the Character View?
Use the Paragraph View?
Use the Character Specifications dialog box?
Choose Font Names?
Set Font Size?
Set Leading?
Set Horizontal Scale?
Set text Color?
Set Color Tint?
Set Type Style?
Set Position?
Set Case?
Set Track?
Set Line End ?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Pictures
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Use the Place dialog box
Choose File Types
Set Place
Link and Embed Pictures
Retain Cropping Data
Use the Object View
Position pictures on page
Set the Frame Size
Set the picture Scale
Rotate picture
Skew picture
Flip picture
Copy, Cut and Paste pictures
Wrap Text around pictures
Colorize pictures
Crop pictures
Position pictures in Frame

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Placing Pictures

•

The Place dialog box
allows you to Import
graphics of various file
formats such as Tiff,
Eps, Jpeg and Gif.

Using the
Place dialog
box

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 34

The Place dialog box allows you to Import graphics of various file
formats such as Tiff, Eps, Jpeg and Gif. The files that can be placed
in PageMaker depend on part on the graphic filters that you have
installed:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

When you open a graphic file from the place dialog box, your pointer
icon will turn into a graphic icon:

Note: The graphic files that can be placed into your publication will
depend in part on the import filters you have installed into PageMaker.
If you have a problem installing a particular file type, it may not have
the necessary filter installed.
Choosing File
Types

•

There are various File Types that can be imported into PageMaker.
When you have the Importable Files option selected from the Files of
type drop-down list, the explorer window will display all the various
graphic (and text) formats that you can import into your publication
such as Tiff, Eps, Jpeg and Gif:

Kind Field

•

The Kind field will indicate what type of graphic file placing into your
publication. Whether it is a TIFF image or other:

Size Field

•

The Size field Indicates to you how large the file you are placing will
be. The file information is important when you need to control the file
size of your publication:

Last Modified
Field

•

The Last Modified field allows you to see the date, and time of when
the file selected was last modified:

Setting Place

•

The Place options allow you to
choose how a graphic is placed
in your publication:

•

The As independent graphic option adds the graphic to your
publication as an independent image.
The Replacing entire graphic option will delete a selected existing
graphic from your publication and replace it with the new placed
graphic. When the new graphic is placed, it will retain all the same
characteristic of the former graphic such as the image scale or size,
cropping data (if you select the check box), location, and even color (if
you are placing grayscale images).

•

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Linking and
Embedding
Pictures

•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

When you open an image from the Place dialog box, an Alert
message may appear, prompting you to include a complete copy of
the selected image into your publication. The Alert will only appear if
the placed image is larger than the default image size of 256 KBytes.
If you select No to the prompt, you will place only a low-resolution
version of the image into your publication with a link to the High
Resolution file:

If you select Yes to the prompt, you will place the full high-resolution
image into your publication. The image will now be embedded into
your publication and it will increase the size of your publication more
so than when you placed the low-resolution link. The size of the
increase will depend on the size of the image:

Note: If you link an image you cannot move or delete the original
graphic. If PageMaker cannot locate the original high-resolution image
when you print, you will only get the low-resolution output. But if you
have embedded the image, all the necessary data in already there for
PageMaker to use in order to output the high-resolution publication.
Retaining
Cropping
Data

•

The Retain Cropping Data option keeps the cropping information
from the original image when you are replacing an image. This option
is only available when the Replacing Entire Graphic option is
selected:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

85
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Modifying Picture

•

The Control Palette allows
you to adjust the size of
your picture, the location of
the picture on the page, the
size of your picture frame,
the rotation of the picture,
or the how the picture is
skewed.

Using the
Object View

•

Positioning
pictures on
page

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 35

The Object View of the Control Palette allows you to adjust the size
of your picture, the location of the picture on the page, the size of your
picture frame, the rotation of the picture, or the how the picture is
skewed.
From the main menu, choose Window > Show Control Palette to
display the Control palette:

•

The Position field allows you to adjust the position of your picture
anywhere on the X and Y access of the publication page:

•

The Nudge buttons allow you to move, resize or transform a picture
in small increments. You can also use the Shift key while you click on
the nudge button to increase the nudging by a multiply of ten:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Setting the
Frame Size

Setting the
picture Scale

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

The Size field allows you to adjust the width and height of a picture
as well as the cropping rectangle:

•

You can also use the Cropping option in the Control palette to crop a
picture which will also reduce it’s size:

•

The Percent Scale field allows you to scale your picture:

Other Scale options:
Printer resolution Scaling option
Proportional scaling option
Scaling option
Rotating
picture

•

The Rotate field allows you to rotate a picture by ± 360 degrees in
increments of .01 degree. Use the Rotating tool in the toolbox to
rotate an object manually around any fixed point, or use the Rotating
option on the Control palette to rotate relative to the reference point
selected on the Proxy:

Skewing
picture

•

The Control palette can be used to Skew a picture horizontally by ± 85
degrees in increments of .01 degree.
To skew an object, select the object.
From the main menu, choose Window > Show Control Palette.
Click or double-click to select a reference point on the Proxy:

•
•
•

Flipping
pictures

•

You can Flip a picture either vertically or horizontally with the
Reflection button in the control palette:

The Horizontal Reflection button:
The Vertical Reflection button:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

To Copy a
Picture

•
•

Select the desired picture.
From the main menu, choose Edit > Copy
OR press the Ctrl + C key combination.

To Paste the
copied
picture

•

From the main menu, choose Edit > Paste
OR press the Ctrl + V key combination.

To Cut a
picture

•
•

Select the desired picture you would like to Cut.
From the main menu, choose Edit > Cut
OR press the Ctrl + X key combination.
After you select the Cut command, the selected picture will be
removed.

•
To Past the
cut picture

•
•

Paste the cut picture.
Move it to where it is required.

Wrapping
Text around
pictures

•

To Text Wrap around another text block, select the text block around
which you want text to wrap, and then choose Element > Group.
PageMaker now treats the text block like a graphic. With the grouped
text block selected, apply a text-wrap option. To wrap text around only
three sides of a graphic, position either the left or right edge of the
graphic against a column guide.
Alternatively, you can increase the standoff values enough to put the
graphics boundary next to the column guide:

•

Colorizing
pictures

•

The Colorizing function will only work with 1 bit bitmaps or grayscale
bitmaps. When Colorizing Pictures you define a color, you specify
whether it is a spot color, process color, or a tint of a spot or process
color.

To Colorize a
bitmap

•
•

Select a 1 bit or grayscale bitmap
From the main menu, choose Window > Show Colors
OR press the Ctrl + J key combination to open the Color palette.
Click the Fill button.
Select a color and or tint from the colors palette list.

•
•

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Cropping

•

When you import a graphic
from another program or
publication, you can crop
parts of the graphic that
you do not want to print by
adjusting the size of its
surrounding bounding box.

Cropping
pictures

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 36

•

When you import a graphic from another program or publication, you
can crop parts of the graphic that you do not want to print by adjusting
the size of its surrounding bounding box.

•
•
•

Select a crop tool from the Control palette
Click on a picture to display nodes.
Click and drag a node to crop parts of the picture:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•
•

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Note that while you dragging a node, the image will become a
grayscale.
After you crop a graphic, you can control which portions of it appear in
your publication by moving the graphic within the visible area. Just
click on the picture and drag it inside the cropped area:

You cannot crop to resize the visible area of locked objects, but you
can change what portion of the image shows within the cropped area.
Note: If you crop an inline graphic with the Control palette, you can
only crop from the center. To crop from any other point, use the
cropping tool in the toolbox.

Positioning
pictures in
Frame

•

•
•
•

For Positioning in Frame graphics larger or smaller than the frames
that contain them, you can specify that graphics be clipped to fit within
the existing frame borders (applies only to graphics larger than the
frame), or scaled to fit the existing frame borders.
Alternatively, you can specify that the frame size to fit the size of the
graphic.
You can specify an inset value between text and the frame border.
You can set a separate inset value for each side of a rectangular text
frame, or set a single inset value for oval or polygonal text frames.
You can change how the content aligns vertically and horizontally
within the frame. For example, you might want some graphics to be
positioned in the center of a frame; in other frames you might want the
graphics to align along the top and left borders of the available space.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 37

Use the Place dialog box?
Choose File Types?
Set Place?
Link and Embed Pictures?
Retain Cropping Data?
Use the Object View?
Position pictures on page?
Set the Frame Size?
Set the picture Scale?
Rotate picture?
Skew picture?
Flip picture?
Copy, Cut and Paste pictures?
Wrap Text around pictures?
Colorize pictures?
Crop pictures?
Position pictures in Frame?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Objects

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Objects
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Select Objects
Group and Ungroup Objects
Move Objects with the Mouse
Move Objects with the Control Panel
Remove Objects
Use the Align Objects Dialog Box
Use the Align Icons
Use the Distribute Icons
Use the Alignment Preview
Setting the Do Mini Save
Arrange Objects

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Selecting Objects

•
•

Use the Pointer tool when
selecting objects.
You can select a single
object, or you can select
multiple objects and modify
them all at once.

Selecting
single Object
with the
Pointer Tool

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 38

Use the Pointer tool when selecting objects. You can select a single
object, or you can select multiple objects and modify them all at once.
When objects overlap, you can select them through the stack of
objects.
To select a single object, click on the object with the pointer tool:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Objects

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Selecting
multiple
Objects with
the Pointer
Tool

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

To Add an object or objects to a selection, hold down Shift key as you
click on the other object(s):

•

An object has been added to the selection:

•

To Remove an object from a selection, hold down Shift key as you
click on the object you would like to remove:

•

The Object has been removed from the selection:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Selecting
Objects with
the Marquee
Box

•
•

•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

To select several objects at once, drag the pointer tool around multiple
objects. Be sure to include each object's bounding box within the
selection area.
Using the Pointer tool, select the objects by clicking and dragging a
Marquee Box around the desired area:

The objects have all been selected:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Objects

95
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Grouped Objects

•

A Group of objects, when
selected, appears with four
handles at the corners that
define the bounding box of
all objects in the group.

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 39

Grouping
Objects

•

A Group, when selected, appears with four handles at the corners that
define the bounding box of all objects in the group. Hold the Ctrl key
to select an Individual objects within a group so it can be modified:

Ungrouping
Objects

•
•
•

Select the group.
From the main menu, choose Element > Ungroup.
The objects retain the changes you made while the objects were
grouped:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Moving Objects

Moving Objects
•

To Move objects with the
mouse:
1. Place the pointer over the
object you would like to
move and select it.
2. Click and drag the object
to the new desired
location.
3. The object has now been
moved.

Moving
objects using
the Mouse

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 40

•

Place the pointer over the object you would like to move and select it:

•

Click and drag the object to the new desired location:

•

The object has now been moved:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Objects

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Moving
objects using
the Control
Palette

•

Removing
Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Moving with the Control palette offers an alternative to manipulating an
object manually. Because you can enter exact values, the Control
palette allows you to work with graphics and text objects precisely, and
several changes can be made without switching to the toolbox or
choosing commands.
Select the required object for moving:

•

Type in the Y or X field to zoom in closer or further away depending on
the numerical input:

•

Select the required object to be removed:

•

From the main menu, choose Edit > Clear
OR press the Delete key:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Aligning Objects

Aligning Objects
•

With the Align Objects
dialog box, you can
align objects in relation
to one another, and/or
evenly distribute the
spaces between the
objects.

Using the
Align Objects
dialog box

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 41

•

With the Align Objects dialog box, you can align objects in relation to
one another, and/or evenly distribute the spaces between the objects:

•

Align or Distribute objects based on a common edge or based on the
centers of objects. For example, select the align-right icon to move
objects horizontally so that their right edges line up with the right edge
of the rightmost object. Each Icon has an example of how it will align
or distribute your objects.
Note: To align objects to a grid, use rulers and guides.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Objects

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Setting the
Align Icons

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

The Align icons allow you to change the alignment of icons. You can
choose to align icons left, center, right, or not at all:
The Vertical Alignment Icons:

The Horizontal Alignment Icons:

An active alignment is highlighted in yellow:

Setting the
Distribute
Icons

•

The Distribute icons are modular and can be arranged in groups that
are relevant to your working style. The spaces between the objects
are distributed evenly, to provide the desired effect:
The Vertical Distribution Icons:

Horizontal Distribution Icons:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

100

Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the
Alignment
Preview

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

The Alignment Preview allows you to see the change of the aligned
objects:

•

Objects before they are aligned:

•

The vertical and horizontal icons used:

•

The end result of the alignment:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Objects

101
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Arranging Objects

Arranging Objects
•

•

The Send To Back
command will move
selected objects to the
back most level of any
overlapping objects.
The Bring To Front
command will move
selected objects to the
front most level of any
overlapping objects.

Using the
Arrange
menu

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 42

•
•

To arrange objects, select an object on the page.
From the main menu, choose Element > Arrange:

•

Select one of four available arrange commands.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

102

Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using Send
to Back

•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

The Send To Back command will move selected objects to the back
most level of any overlapping objects. This is unavailable if no objects
are selected, or no publication is open.
Selected Object:

Selected object sent to back:

Using Send
Backward

•

The Send Backward command will move selected objects back one
level in a stack of overlapping objects. This is unavailable if no objects
are selected, or no publication is open.
Selected Object:

Using Bring
To Front

•

Selected Object sent back one level:

•

The Bring To Front command will move selected objects to the front
most level of any overlapping objects. This is unavailable if no objects
are selected, or no publication is open.
Selected object sent to back by mistake:

Problem corrected by brining it to the front:

Note: Hold down Ctrl as you click to select an object that is behind
another object. Each time you click on overlapping objects, you select
the next level down in the stacking order, or through to the topmost
object in the next layer in the stack of layers.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Objects

103

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Using Bring
Forward

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

The Bring Forward command will move selected objects up one level
in a stack of overlapping objects. This is unavailable if no objects are
selected, or no publication is open.
Hidden back most object select with the Ctrl click selection:

Selected object moved up one level:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

104

Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 43

Select Objects?
Group and Ungroup Objects?
Move Objects with the Mouse?
Move Objects with the Control Panel?
Remove Objects?
Use the Align Objects Dialog Box?
Use the Align Icons?
Use the Distribute Icons?
Use the Alignment Preview?
Setting the Do Mini Save?
Arrange Objects?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Output

105

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Output
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Use the Print dialog box
Set Print Document options
Select a Printer
Print multiple Copies
Collate pages
Reverse pages
Set Pages
Print Page Ranges
Set Non-Printing option
Print Blank Pages
Set Print Paper options
Choose Paper Sizes
Choose Paper Source
Print Printer’s Marks
Print Page Information
Tile Pages
Scale Pages
Print Thumbnails
Use Fit Preview
Set Print Options
Send Image Data
Set Print Color options
Composite Print
Black and White Print
Set Print Features options

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

106

Output

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Printing Your Work

•

When you are ready to
print your publication,
go to File > Print to open
up the Print Document
dialog box.

Using the
Print dialog
box

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 44

• When you are ready to print your publication, go to File > Print to open
up the Print Document dialog box:

• With the Print Document dialog box, you can print a black-and-white,
grayscale, or color publication on a range of output devices. When you
open a new publication, the default print settings allow you to print a
composite (all page elements print on the same page, as opposed to
separations where page elements print on different pages, depending
on their color and page assignment). If you print to different printers for
proofing and final output, your Document Setup settings should match
those of your final output device:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Output

107
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Print Document

Print Document
•

The Print Document displays settings that will allow you to
setup various output options.

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 45

Setting Print
Document
options

•

The Document button will display Print Document dialog box which
allows you to setup various output options such as, which printer you
will output from, the page you want to print, the number of pages you
would like to print and the orientation you would like to publication to
print to:

Selecting a
Printer

•

The Printer drop-down list allows you to choose various types of
printers you may have installed locally or on a network:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

108

Output

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Printing
multiple
Copies

•

The Copies field allows you to set the number of copies of your
publication you would like to print:

Collating
pages

•

The Collate check box allows you to print multiple copies of a
document in the order in which it appears in the publication:

Note: This setting takes longer to print than if you sent the document
as un-collated. The document is sent to the printer as though you
were sending a single copy of the document several times.
Reversing
pages

•

The Reverse check box allows you to change the order in which your
publication will print, so instead of the publication printing from pages
1-10, the reverse check box will print from 10-1:

Setting Pages

•

The Pages section allows you to select page specific options such as
the page Range, page order, etc:

•

The All radio button allows you to print all the pages used in the
publication:

•

The Print drop-down list allows you to set your publication to print only
Even Pages which will only print the even numbered pages (2,4,6…),
Odd Pages which will only print the odd numbered pages (1,3,5…) or
Both Pages which will print both the even and odd numbered pages
(1,2,3,4…):

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Output

109

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Printing Page
Ranges

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

The Print Ranges refers the range of pages you want to print in the
active publication:

•

Typing a hyphen between two numbers tells PageMaker to print all of
the pages in that range. You must type the numbers separated by
hyphens in ascending order (2-4, not 4-2.).
Page numbers separated by commas do not have to be typed in any
order (1, 5, 20, 8).
You can combine the hyphens and commas in the range field to get
more control of the pages you want to print. Example: You can type 15, 19, 10, 11 to print pages 1 through 5, followed by page 19, and
ending with pages 10 and 11. You can type up to 64 characters in the
field.

•
•

Note: If you have set up your document to print only even or odd
pages, only the pages that fall into one of the before mentioned
categories will print. To avid this problem you must set the publication
to print both even and odd pages.
Setting NonPrinting
option

•

The Ignore “Non-Printing” Setting check box allows you to print
objects that are specified as Non-Printing. Non-Printing objects are
selected objects in your publication that you have set as Non-Printing,
so that they are visible in your publication but do not print when the
page is output:

To create a
Non-printing
object

•
•

Select the object.
From the main menu, choose Element > Non-Printing.

To hide or
display nonprinting
objects in
your
publication:

•

From the main menu, choose View > Display Non-Printing Items.

Printing
Blank Pages

•

Printing Blank Pages is used when you create long documents, such
as technical manuals or books, and typically divide them into individual
PageMaker publications (You might, for example, create a separate
publication for each chapter, the table of contents, the index, and the
front matter).
Dividing a book into separate publications reduces the size of a single
file and lets several people work on individual files throughout the
writing and production of the book. When you print, you can print the
files individually or combine them to print all at once:

•

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

110

Output

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Orientation
Options /
Icons

•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

The Orientation icons can change the way in which the publication
will print on the paper. You can choose from tall (also known as
portrait) to wide (landscape):

Portrait or Tall orientation icon:

Landscape or wide orientation icon:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Output

111
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Print Paper

Print Paper
•

The Print Paper dialog box allows you to define settings that
determine how the publication will print on the various paper
sizes available on you printer or output device.

Setting Print
Paper
options

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 46

The Paper button will display the Print Paper dialog box which
allows you to define settings that determine how the publication will
print on the various paper sizes available on you printer or output
device:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

112

Output

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Choosing
Paper Sizes

•

The Size drop-down list provides a list of printable pages sizes that
are available to your printer or output device. Some common paper
sizes in the US are Legal (8 ½” x 14”), Letter (8 ½” x 11”), and Tabloid
(11”x17”), and in Europe some common paper sizes are A4 (210mm x
297mm), A3 (297mm x 420mm), A5 (148mm x 210mm) and B5
(127mm x 250mm):

Choosing
Paper Source

•

Paper Source lets you choose the location of where the paper you will
be printing to is located in the printer such as the cassette, or manual
feed tray:

Printing
Printer’s
Marks

•

The Printer's Marks option prints crop marks, registration marks,
density-control bars, and a color-control bar on separations or
composites of your publication.
These marks help your commercial printer align separations and judge
color accuracy. The Printer's Marks option requires 0.75 inches (22.2
mm) in addition to the document size (You can also select Crops and
Bleeds Only to limit the kinds of marks that appear):

•

Printing Page
Information

•

The Page Information option prints the filename, page number,
current date, and spot- or process-color separation name in 8-point
Arial in the lower-left corner of each sheet of paper or film. The Page
Information option requires 0.5 inches (13 mm) along the horizontal
edge:

Note: Be sure to select a paper size big enough for your publication,
the printer's marks, and the page information. The Printer's Marks and
Page Information options together require 0.75 inches (22.2 mm) in
addition to the document size. The offset values in the Fit section are
red if the publication, printer's marks, or page information do not fit in
the printable area defined in the PPD.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Output

113

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Tiling Pages

•
•
•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

The Tiling drop-down list will allow you to tile a publication
automatically or you can specify the tiles yourself (manually).
When you print tiles Automatically, PageMaker will calculate the
number of pages required, including the overlap. The pages are also
then centered in the print area on the collection of tiles to be printed.
Tiling Manually allows you to control the exact dimensions of the tiles:

Note: Each time you print, PageMaker prints a tile for all of the pages
you specify to print in the Print Document dialog box.
Scaling
Pages

•

The Scale options allows you to scale your publication, auto fit your
publication, or create thumbnail prints of your publication:

•

The Scale Percentage field allows you to fit an oversized publication
on a smaller piece of paper, or increase the size of the publication to
use up more of the printable page size.
The Reduce to fit check box will automatically determine the best size
to scale your publication to, so that it will fit on your printed page.

•
Printing
Thumbnails

•

The Thumbnails radio button allows you to setup your publication to
print as thumbnails and determine the number of publication pages
you want to print per thumbnail page:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

114

Output

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

To Print
Thumbnail
proofs

•
•
•

•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

From the main menu, choose File > Print.
If you're printing on a non-PostScript printer, click Options.
If you are printing on a PostScript printer, select a PPD that matches
your printer type and click Paper.
Click the Thumbnails radio button and type in the number of
thumbnails (from 1 to 1000) you want to print on each page. The size
of the printed thumbnails is determined by the number you set in the
per page field.
Click Print.
Note: If you have specified page ranges when creating thumbnails of a
publication, each range starts a new page of thumbnails. For
example, if you specify a page range of "2, 4-20, a thumbnail of page 2
will print on one page, and thumbnails of pages 4-20 will print on the
next page or set of pages.

Using Fit
Preview

•
•

The Fit Preview section shows you either a graphical representation
of a page or the numerical data. The Offset values below the page
indicate if the page is too large for the currently selected page size.
To toggle between the graphic fit and the numerical fit formats, doubleclick the page representation in the Fit section:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Output

115

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Graphical Representation view:

Numerical Data view:

Offset values information:

Note: PageMaker gets the offset and paper information for the Fit
section from the selected PPD. If the PPD does not match the
capabilities or the printer, the offset information may be incorrect.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

116

Output

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Print Options

Print Options
•

The Print Options dialog box allows you to setup how
placed images or type will print when your publication is
outputted.

Setting Print
Options

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 47

The Options button will display the Print Options dialog box, which
allows you to setup how placed images or type will print when you
publication is outputted. You can also set the Data encoding which
affects the file size of the data, which is transmitted over a network:

Note: An image encoded using Binary image data is half the size of
an image encoded using ASCII image data and takes half the time to
transmit. Older PC networks may not support binary data
transmission, so in Windows, the PageMaker default data encoding is
ASCII, and the binary encoding option is available only when you print
to a Postscript file.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Output

117

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Sending
Image Data

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

The Send Image Data drop-down list allows you so select the quality
in which to print your placed images:

•

Choose Normal to send the high-resolution bitmap-image data to the
printer. This option is best used when you are printing line art or
grayscale bitmap images containing black-and-white data.
Choose Optimized Subsampling if you want to proof your work on a
low-resolution printer but your publication contains high-resolution
images. This option is best used when you have placed bitmap
images with a large tonal range into your publication or if the placed
images contain more image data than the printer needs. PageMaker
prints the images at the best possible resolution for your printer,
removing the image data that your output device cannot use.
Choose Low Resolution to print bitmap images at 72 dpi (dots per
inch), which will reduce printing time.
Choose Omit Images if you do not want any bitmap images to print.
This option is best used when you want to proof the layout of the text
in a document.

•

•
•

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

118

Output

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Print Color

Print Color
•

The Print Color dialog box allows you to setup how the
colored object and placed images used in your publications
will print.

Setting Print
Color options

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 48

The Color button will display the Print Color dialog box which
allows you to setup how the colored object and placed images used in
your publications will print:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Output

119

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Composite
Printing

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

The Composite radio button prints the process color elements of your
publication on one page. Where as the Separations radio button
prints the process color elements of you publications onto 4 for
separate pages. The pages will represent one of the four colors used
to create process color: they are Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black.
If you use any non-process colors in your publication, PageMaker will
covert the colors to the closest process equivalent before printing:

•

If you are printing to a PostScript printer, PageMaker will display Color
or Grayscale depending on the capabilities of the printer PPD you
have selected.
The Color Composite option allows you to print a color composite of
a color publication on a desktop printer. The color composite can be
used as a final print if you are not planning to print your publication
with a commercial printer who uses printing inks rather than toner or
ink cartages. However, if you plan to take your publication to a
commercial printer, you can print a color composite to verify that the
correct colors are applied to your objects and to get a sense of how
the final printed publication will look. The level of accuracy to the final
printing press print will depend on your output device and how it has
been calibrated.
The Grayscale Composite allows you to print visually correct grays of
colored elements. For example, since yellow is visually lighter than
black, the gray that prints to simulate the 20% tint of yellow is lighter
than the gray that prints to show the 20% tint of black.

•

Note: The Allow Printer Halftones check box in the Print Color dialog
box allows you to use the printer drivers halftone settings print
halftones instead of the PageMaker Image Control settings:

Black and
White
Printing

•

The Print Colors in Black option allows you to print colors as a tint of
black. For example, if you specified a 20% tint of black and a 20% tint
of a green, the 20% tints of black and green would be identical as
identical tints when the publication is printed:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

120

Output

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Print Features

Print Features
• The Print Features dialog box is specific to every printer you select
and it allows you to setup more print options.

Setting Print
Features
options

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 49

The Features button will display the Print Features dialog box
which is specific to every printer you select. The print features dialog
box allows you to setup more print options such as Duplex, printing to
special trays, printer specific color options, and printing to special
types of stock (card, transparency, or recycled):

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Output

121

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

If you have selected a Non-PostScript printer, you will need use the
Setup button to set the printer features:

Note: For the Non-PostScript printers, the Paper button is changed
into a Setup button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

122

Output

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 50

Use the Print dialog box?
Set Print Document options?
Select a Printer?
Print multiple Copies?
Collate pages?
Reverse pages?
Set Pages?
Print Page Ranges?
Set Non-Printing option?
Print Blank Pages?
Set Print Paper options?
Choose Paper Sizes?
Choose Paper Source?
Print Printer’s Marks?
Print Page Information?
Tile Pages?
Scale Pages?
Print Thumbnails?
Use Fit Preview?
Set Print Options?
Send Image Data?
Set Print Color options?
Composite Print?
Black and White Print?
Set Print Features options?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Adobe PageMaker 6.5
Foundation Level
Exercise Workbook

C C T G L O B A L

.C O M

Courseware Release Version 5.0

INSTALLING THE SAMPLE FILES INTO A FOLDER ....................................................................... 1
INSTALLING THE SAMPLE FILES ................................................................................................................... 1
INTRODUCTION TO PAGEMAKER ...................................................................................................... 3
SETTING UP GENERAL PREFERENCES .......................................................................................................... 3
DOCUMENTS .............................................................................................................................................. 5
OPENING DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................................................ 5
CHANGING THE DOCUMENT SETUP ............................................................................................................. 6
TOOLS .......................................................................................................................................................... 7
MODIFYING ELEMENTS ............................................................................................................................... 7
COLORS AND FILLS ................................................................................................................................. 9
CREATING COLORS ..................................................................................................................................... 9
USING THE COLORS PALETTE ................................................................................................................... 11
TEXT ........................................................................................................................................................... 15
INPUTTING TEXT ....................................................................................................................................... 15
PLACING TEXT .......................................................................................................................................... 17
PICTURES.................................................................................................................................................. 21
PLACING PICTURES ................................................................................................................................... 21
MODIFYING PICTURE COLOR .................................................................................................................... 23
POSITIONING PICTURES ............................................................................................................................. 26
OBJECTS.................................................................................................................................................... 29
SPACING AND ALIGNING OBJECTS ............................................................................................................ 29
RESIZING AND MODIFYING OBJECTS ........................................................................................................ 32
OUTPUT ..................................................................................................................................................... 33
PRINT YOUR DOCUMENT .......................................................................................................................... 33

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES – Installing the Sample Files into a Folder
PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

1
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Installing the Sample Files into a Folder
Installing the sample files
•
•

•

Use the Windows Explorer to create a folder called PageMaker 6.5 Foundation Samples
folder, just below the My Documents folder.
If you are installing the sample files from a diskette, place the diskette in the diskette drive
and copy the files to the My Documents\ PageMaker 6.5 Foundation Samples folder. If
these files have been copied to your network server, then ask your trainer/supervisor for
more information about how to copy these files to your PC’s hard disk.
Notes for tutors
the above instructions are for Windows 95 - and for Windows 98 that has not been setup for a
multi-user environment (with individual profiles). The instructions above may also require
modification within a Windows NT environment. Where possible pre-install the relevant work
files prior to use by students/delegates.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES – Introduction to PageMaker

3
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Introduction to PageMaker
Setting up General Preferences
•

Use the Windows Explorer to create a folder and call it PageMaker 6.5 Foundation Work
Folder. Place your new folder just below the My Documents folder, and copy all PageMaker
sample files from the Samples folder into the Work Folder. We will be utilizing these samples
as the basis for the PageMaker 6.5 Foundation Exercises.

•

From the main menu, choose File > Preferences > General to open the General
Preferences dialog box:

•

Make the following changes:
Measurements in:
Vertical ruler:
Graphics Display:
Horizontal nudge:
Vertical nudge:
Save options:
Guides:

•

Inches
Inches
Standard
0.01 Inches
0.01 Inches
Faster
Front

Select the OK button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Documents
PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

5
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Documents
Opening Documents
•

From your PageMaker 6.5 Foundation Work Folder open the PageMaker template file
called Sample 1.T65:

•
•
•
•
•

The Sample 1.T65 file will open up as a copy of the original.
Select Save As from the File menu.
Name the file PageMaker Exercise 1.p65.
Select version Publication from the Save as type drop down list.
Select the No additional files radio button from the Copy section:

•
•

Click the Save button.
Your file name should now appear in the window title bar.
FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Documents - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Changing the Document Setup
•
•

From the Main menu, choose File > Document Setup.
Change the page size to:
Orientation:
Width:
Height:

•

Tall
7.5
10

Select the OK button:

Note: If the page becomes hard to read, please select from the main
menu View > Fit in Window.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Tools
PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

7
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Tools
Modifying Elements
•

Note: If your Tools palette is hidden please select Window > Show Tools.

•
•

Within your sample document exercise select the Pointer tool from your Tool palette.
With the Pointer tool, select the large Black Box on the page:

•

With the large Black Box selected, choose Element > Fill and Stroke:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Tools - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Within the Fill and stroke dialog box, make the following changes:
Fill:
Stroke:
Color:

•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

None
.5pt
Black

Your document should look like this:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES – Colors and Fills
PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

9
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Colors and Fills
Creating Colors
•

From the main menu, choose Utilities > Define Colors to open the Define Colors dialog
box:

•
•

Within the Define Colors dialog box, select the color Green from the list.
Select the Edit button OR double click the color from the list to open the Color Options
dialog box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Colors and Fills - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Within the Color Options dialog box, make the following changes:
Name:
Type:
Model:
Overprint:
Cyan:
Magenta:
Yellow:
Black:

•
•
•
•

•

Blue C100, M80
Process
CMYK
Unchecked
100
80
0
0

Select the OK button.
Back in the Define Colors dialog box, select the color Red from the list.
Select the Edit button OR double click the color from the list to open the Color Options
dialog box.
Within the Color Options dialog box, make the following changes:
Name:
Type:
Model:
Overprint:
Cyan:
Magenta:
Yellow:
Black:

•
•
•

Green C80, Y100
Process
CMYK
Unchecked
80
0
100
0

Select the OK button.
Back in the Define Colors dialog box, select the color Blue from the list.
Select the Edit button OR double click the color from the list to open the Color Options
dialog box.
Within the Color Options dialog box, make the following changes:
Name:
Type:
Model:
Overprint:
Cyan:
Magenta:
Yellow:
Black:

•
•
•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Red M100, Y100
Process
CMYK
Unchecked
0
100
100
0

Select the OK button.
Select the OK button again to return back to the publication.
Choose File > Save to save your work.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES – Colors and Fills
PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

11
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the Colors Palette
•

Using the Pointer tool, select the Red box at the bottom of the screen:

•

Open the Colors palette, by selecting Window > Show Colors:

•

Select the Create New Color icon.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Colors and Fills - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Within the Color Options dialog box, make the following changes:
Name:
Type:
Model:
Overprint:
Cyan:
Magenta:
Yellow:
Black:

Orange M40, Y80
Spot
CMYK
Unchecked
0
40
80
0

•

Select the OK button:

•

With the new color highlighted in the Colors palette, select the Create New Color icon again.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES – Colors and Fills

•

13
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Within the Color Options dialog box, make the following changes:
Name:
Type:
Base Color:
Overprint:
Tint:

Orange Tint
Tint
Orange M40, Y80
Unchecked
50

•

Select the OK button:

•
•
•

Back in the publication, with the Red box still selected, select the Stroke button.
Select the Orange M40, Y80 color from the colors palette list.
Select the Fill button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Colors and Fills - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Select the Orange Tint color from the Colors palette list:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Unselect the now Orange box by clicking on the blank Pasteboard.
Double-click the Orange Tint color.
Rename the color Orange Tint 65.
Change the Tint to 65.
Press OK button.
Save your work.

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Text
PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

15
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Text
Inputting Text
•

Within your Tool palette select the Text tool, and mouse click on the frame with the words
"Enter File Name Here”:

•

Within the text frame, highlight the all the words, use the click and drag method or triple-click
to select all text.
Change the text color to Red M100, Y100.
Then with the text cursor enter the name “PageMaker Exercise 1” into the text box:

•
•

With the Text tool still selected, mouse click on the text box with the large body of text that
reads: “The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog.”
Use the Ctrl + A key combination to select all the text in the box:

Note: There is too much text to try and click and drag, and the triple-click option will only
select one paragraph.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•
•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

With the text highlighted, press the Delete key, or press the Backspace key.
The text should all be gone:

Note: To get the text back into the text box you can input it, but you don’t have to for this
exercise.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Text
PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

17
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Placing Text
•
•
•

With the Text tool still selected click on the large text box.
Open the Place dialog box, choosing File > Place.
Select the “The Quick Brow Fox.txt” file from the PageMaker 6.5 Foundation Work Folder:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•
•
•

Select the As new story Option.
Select the Open Button.
When The Text-only import filter appears, make the following changes:

At end of every line:
Between paragraphs:
Replace:
Monospace:
No conversion:
Dos text file:
Windows text file:
•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Unchecked
Unchecked
Unchecked
Unchecked
Checked
Unchecked
Checked

Place the Loaded Text Icon on the Text Frame and click the mouse:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Text
PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

19
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Highlight all the text:

•

Open the Character Specifications dialog box, choosing Type > Character:

•

Within the Character Specifications dialog box, make the following changes:
Font:
Track:

Arial
Normal

•
•

Click the OK button.
Open the Character palette, choosing Window > Show Control Palette:

•
•
•

Using the Type Size drop-down list, change the size of the type to 10.
Using the Leading drop-down list, change the size of the leading to 15.
From the Type Style buttons, click the Bold button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

Click the Paragraph icon to display the Paragraph Palette:

•

Click the Full Justification button:

•

Click the Apply button to make sure all of your changes have been applied:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Pictures

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Pictures
Placing Pictures
•
•
•
•
•

Within your Toolbox select the Pointer tool.
Open the Place dialog box.
Choose the “Page 1a Pic.tif” file from the PageMaker 6.5 Foundation Work Folder.
Then select Open.
When you see the Graphic icon, place it over the pasteboard:

•

Select the graphic:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

In the Control palette change the scale of the graphic to 35%:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Pictures

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Modifying Picture Color
•
•

With the graphic still selected, click the Fill icon in the Colors palette.
Select the Green C80, Y100 color from the list:

•

Click the empty frame located on the left, above the large text frame:

•
•
•

With the Frame selected, choose Element > Fill and Stroke.
Change the color of the fill to None.
Select a Custom Stroke size of 3:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

Change the color of the stroke to Blue C100, M80:

•

The Frame should look like this:

•

Click and drag the drag the colorized graphic over the empty frame that you just modified:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Pictures

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•
•

Select the Crop tool from the Control palette.
Select the colorized picture:

•

Crop the Colorized image until the size is just a but smaller that the empty Frame:

•

Send the picture backward until graphic is just behind the outline of the empty frame:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Positioning Pictures
•

With the Pointer tool, click on the Black Box on the lower left corner:

•
•

Open the Place dialog box.
Select the “Page 1b Pic.jpg” file from the PageMaker 6.5 Foundation Work Folder:

•
•
•

Select the Within Frame option.
Click the Open button.
Select the Crop tool from the Toolbox.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Pictures

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Place the mouse pointer in the box and move the image within the box until the image is
visually centered horizontally:

•
•
•
•
•

Select the Pointer tool.
Select the Graphic Frame on the bottom left.
Hold down the Shift key
Select the Empty Frame in front of the colorized picture on the top right.
Select the Orange Frame on the bottom right:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•
•

From the main menu, choose Element > Text Wrap to display the Text Wrap dialog box.
Make the following changes to frame:

•
•

Click OK button.
The text will wrap around the objects and your page should look like this:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Objects
PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

29
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Objects
Spacing and Aligning Objects
•

Click the number 2 Page Icon at the bottom of the work window to go to page two:

•
•

Select all elements.
Hold down the Shift key and unselect the Line:

•
•
•
•

Press Delete to remove all selected content from the page.
Select the Line.
In the Control palette, select the far right point from the Proxy icon.
Make the following changes to the Line:

X:
Y:
L:
Rotation:
•

-0.5
3
6.5
0

Click Apply button:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Objects - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•
•
•

With the Line still selected, Copy the Line.
Paste the Line 10 times.
When you Paste the last pasted line, move the line to the bottom, and place it on the page
margin.

•

Select all the lines, using a marquee selection:

•

Press the Shift + Ctrl + E key combination to display the Align dialog box.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Objects
PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•

Make the following changes:

•
•
•
•

Select the Horizontal Align to left Icon
Select the Vertical Distribute spaces Icon
Select the Distribute within Bounds Option
Click the OK button:

•

Press the Ctrl + G key combination to group all the lines.

31
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Objects - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Resizing and Modifying Objects
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Select the Rectangle tool.
In the Colors palette, select the Stroke icon.
Choose the Color None.
Select the Fill icon.
Choose the Cyan Color.
From the Tint drop-down list, choose 15%.
Click and drag a box from the Top left corner margin to the bottom Right corner margin:

•

Send the blue box to the back:

•

Save your work.
Note: Open the PageMaker Exercise 1 Final.p65 file from the PageMaker 6.5 Foundation
Samples folder to see an example.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Output

33
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Output
Print Your Document
You are now ready to print your document!
•
•

From the main menu, choose File > Print to open the Print dialog box.
Within the Print Document dialog box, input the following information:

Printer:
PPD:
Copies:
Collate:
Reverse:
Proofs:
Page Range:
Print:
Ignore “Non-Printing” setting:
Reader’s spreads:
Orientation:

select your available printer
select your available printer
1
Unchecked
Unchecked
Unchecked
All
Both Pages
Unchecked
Unchecked
Portrait

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Output - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•
•

Select the Paper button.
Within the Print Paper dialog box, input the following information:

Size:
Source:
Printers marks:
Page information:
Center Page Information:
Tiling:
Scale:
•
•

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

Letter
Select a Source that contains letter size paper
Checked
Checked
unchecked
None
100

Select the Options button.
Within the Print Options dialog box, input the following information:

Send Image Date: Normal
Data encoding:
Send ASCII image data

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Output

35
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Foundation

•
•

Select the Color button.
Within the Print Color dialog box, input the following information:

Composite:
Color:
Print Colors in Black:
Separations:
Mirror:
Negative:
Preserve EPS Colors:
•

Selected
Selected
Unselected
Unselected
Unchecked
Unchecked
Unchecked

Select the Print button to print your document.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Adobe PageMaker 6.5
Intermediate Level
Training Manual
Corporate Edition

C C T G L O B A L

.C O M

Courseware Release Version 5.0

MASTER PAGES......................................................................................................................................... 1
MASTER PAGES PALETTE............................................................................................................................ 2
Displaying the Master Pages palette ..................................................................................................... 2
Using the Master Pages palette ............................................................................................................. 3
Removing the Master Pages tab ............................................................................................................ 4
Selecting the Master Pages palette menu commands ............................................................................ 4
CREATING MASTER PAGES ......................................................................................................................... 5
Using the New Master Page dialog box................................................................................................. 5
Using the Save Page as Master dialog box............................................................................................ 7
Using the Duplicate Master Page dialog box........................................................................................ 7
APPLYING MASTER PAGES ......................................................................................................................... 9
Applying Master Pages to several pages at once................................................................................... 9
Applying a Master Page to one page at a time .................................................................................... 11
EDITING MASTER PAGES .......................................................................................................................... 12
Using the Master Page Options dialog box ......................................................................................... 12
Changing the Column Guides.............................................................................................................. 13
Changing the content of a Master Page .............................................................................................. 13
Removing Master Pages ...................................................................................................................... 14
MASTER PAGE NUMBERS.......................................................................................................................... 15
Adding Page-Number Markers to Master Pages ................................................................................. 15
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 16
DOCUMENT PAGE FEATURES ............................................................................................................ 17
DOCUMENT PAGES.................................................................................................................................... 18
Inserting pages..................................................................................................................................... 18
Displaying the Insert Pages dialog box ............................................................................................... 19
Using the Insert Pages dialog box ....................................................................................................... 19
Inserting pages before you start a publication .................................................................................... 20
REARRANGING PAGES............................................................................................................................... 21
Displaying the Sort Pages dialog box.................................................................................................. 21
Using the Sort Pages dialog box.......................................................................................................... 22
Sorting pages ....................................................................................................................................... 23
PAGE NUMBERS ........................................................................................................................................ 24
Changing the page numbering style .................................................................................................... 24
GO TO PAGE .............................................................................................................................................. 26
Using the Go to Page dialog box......................................................................................................... 26
Going back and forward ...................................................................................................................... 27
Using page icons to navigate............................................................................................................... 27
REMOVE PAGE .......................................................................................................................................... 28
Using the Remove Pages dialog box.................................................................................................... 28
Using page icons to remove pages....................................................................................................... 29
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 30
WORKING WITH TYPE ......................................................................................................................... 31
CONTROL PALETTE TEXT FORMATTING ................................................................................................... 32
Displaying the Control Palette ............................................................................................................ 32
Using the Control Palette Paragraph View......................................................................................... 33
Using the Control Palette to format text.............................................................................................. 34
TEXT THREADS ......................................................................................................................................... 35
Threading text...................................................................................................................................... 35
Threading Text Blocks ......................................................................................................................... 36
Threading Text Frames........................................................................................................................ 38
WORKING WITH PARAGRAPHS ................................................................................................................. 39
Displaying the Paragraph Specifications dialog box .......................................................................... 39
FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Using the Paragraph Specifications dialog box .................................................................................. 40
Formatting paragraphs........................................................................................................................ 40
Using the Paragraph Rules dialog box................................................................................................ 41
Applying paragraph rules.................................................................................................................... 42
Using the Paragraph Rule Options dialog box.................................................................................... 42
STYLE SHEETS .......................................................................................................................................... 43
Displaying the Styles Palette ............................................................................................................... 43
Using the Styles Palette ....................................................................................................................... 44
Using the Styles Palette menu commands............................................................................................ 44
Using the Style Options dialog box...................................................................................................... 45
Creating styles ..................................................................................................................................... 47
Creating styles that apply to the next paragraph you type .................................................................. 47
Applying styles ..................................................................................................................................... 47
INDENTS AND TABS................................................................................................................................... 48
Displaying the Indents/Tabs dialog box............................................................................................... 48
Using the Indents/Tabs dialog box ...................................................................................................... 49
BULLETS AND NUMBERING ....................................................................................................................... 50
Displaying the Bullets and Numbering dialog box .............................................................................. 50
Editing bullets...................................................................................................................................... 51
Adding a bulleted list to a paragraph .................................................................................................. 52
Adding a numbered list to a paragraph............................................................................................... 52
Removing bullets and numbering from a paragraph ........................................................................... 52
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 53
TEXT OBJECTS AND STORIES ............................................................................................................ 55
STORY EDITOR .......................................................................................................................................... 56
Displaying the PageMaker word processor......................................................................................... 56
Using the Story Editor ......................................................................................................................... 57
SPELL CHECKING ...................................................................................................................................... 58
Displaying the Spelling dialog box ...................................................................................................... 58
Using the Spelling dialog box.............................................................................................................. 59
Checking spelling................................................................................................................................. 59
Dealing with incorrectly spelt or unknown words ............................................................................... 60
FINDING AND CHANGING WORDS ............................................................................................................. 61
Displaying the Find dialog box ........................................................................................................... 61
Using the Find dialog box ................................................................................................................... 62
Displaying the Change dialog box....................................................................................................... 62
Using the Change dialog box............................................................................................................... 63
Finding and replacing text................................................................................................................... 64
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 65
DICTIONARY............................................................................................................................................ 67
ADDING WORDS ....................................................................................................................................... 68
Adding words to the User Dictionary .................................................................................................. 68
Adding words using the Spelling dialog box........................................................................................ 69
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 70
COLOR MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................................................ 71
IMPORTING COLORS .................................................................................................................................. 72
Using the EPS import filter to import colors ....................................................................................... 72
Editing imported colors ....................................................................................................................... 73
Controlling imported colors ................................................................................................................ 73
Using EPS imported colors.................................................................................................................. 74
WORKING WITH PANTONES ...................................................................................................................... 75
Displaying Pantone color libraries ..................................................................................................... 75
Adding Pantone colors......................................................................................................................... 76
FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 77
PICTURES.................................................................................................................................................. 79
IMPORTING EPS IMAGES .......................................................................................................................... 80
Using the EPS import filter to place EPS images................................................................................ 80
PHOTO EFFECTS ........................................................................................................................................ 82
Using Photoshop Effects...................................................................................................................... 82
Adding Plug-ins to the Effects list........................................................................................................ 83
Applying Effects to images................................................................................................................... 84
KEYLINES ................................................................................................................................................. 85
Using Keylines ..................................................................................................................................... 85
Adding a Keyline to objects ................................................................................................................. 86
LINKS ........................................................................................................................................................ 87
Displaying the Links Manager............................................................................................................. 87
Using the Links Manager..................................................................................................................... 88
Updating Links..................................................................................................................................... 89
Unlinking images ................................................................................................................................. 89
MASKS ...................................................................................................................................................... 90
Masking images ................................................................................................................................... 90
Unmasking images............................................................................................................................... 92
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 93
WORKING WITH MULTIPLE OBJECTS............................................................................................ 95
TEXT AND GRAPHICS ................................................................................................................................ 96
Adding Inline graphics to text.............................................................................................................. 96
TEXT WRAP .............................................................................................................................................. 98
Using text wrap controls...................................................................................................................... 98
Wrapping text around a graphic.......................................................................................................... 99
Customizing a text wrap ...................................................................................................................... 99
Restoring custom boundaries............................................................................................................. 100
Wrapping text around another text block .......................................................................................... 100
LAYERS................................................................................................................................................... 101
Displaying the Layers palette ............................................................................................................ 101
Using the Layers palette .................................................................................................................... 102
Selecting the Layers palette menu commands.................................................................................... 102
Adding new layers.............................................................................................................................. 103
Changing target layer........................................................................................................................ 105
Rearranging layers ............................................................................................................................ 105
Merging layers................................................................................................................................... 106
Removing layers................................................................................................................................. 107
LOCKING ................................................................................................................................................. 109
Locking objects .................................................................................................................................. 109
Unlocking objects .............................................................................................................................. 109
Locking layers.................................................................................................................................... 110
Unlocking layers................................................................................................................................ 110
REVIEW QUESTIONS................................................................................................................................ 111
POSTSCRIPT PRINTING ...................................................................................................................... 113
PRINTING SPREADS ................................................................................................................................. 114
Printing Reader’s Spreads................................................................................................................. 114
TILING AND SCALING .............................................................................................................................. 116
Tiling pages ....................................................................................................................................... 116
Automatically Tiling pages ................................................................................................................ 117
Manually Tiling pages ....................................................................................................................... 119
Scaling pages..................................................................................................................................... 120
PAGE BLEEDS ......................................................................................................................................... 121
FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Printing bleeds................................................................................................................................... 121
PRINTING WHAT YOU CANNOT SEE ....................................................................................................... 123
Printing Non-Printing objects ........................................................................................................... 123
Creating Non-Printing elements ........................................................................................................ 124
Displaying Non-Printing items .......................................................................................................... 124
REVIEW QUESTIONS................................................................................................................................ 125

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Master Pages
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Display the Master Pages palette
Use the Master Pages palette
Remove the Master Pages tab
Select the Master Pages palette menu commands
Use the New Master Page dialog box
Use the Save Page as Master dialog box
Use the Duplicate Master Page dialog box
Apply Master Pages to several pages at once
Apply a Master Page to one page at a time
Use the Master Page Options dialog box
Change the Column Guides
Change the content of a Master Page
Remove Master Pages
Add Page-Number Markers to a Master Pages

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Master Pages Palette

•

The Master Pages palette
allows you to create and
apply Master Pages to
Publication Pages.

Displaying
the Master
Pages palette

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 2

The Master Pages palette allows you to create and apply Master
Pages to Publication Pages. Use the Master Page icons at the
bottom of the publication window when you want to go to or edit a
master page.

To Show or Hide the Master Page palette:
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Master Pages
OR press the Shift + Ctrl + 8 key combination:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Using the
Master Pages
palette

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

None – Allows you to remove any Master Page content from a
publication:

•

Document Master – Every new publication will include a Document
Master, which is the default master for your initial pages. The
Document Master margins and orientation are determined by the
options specified in the Document Setup:

•

Master Name – Allows you to organize and recognize your master
pages:

•

Facing Page Icon – Informs you that a specific master page is a Two
Page Master:

•

Single Page Icon – Informs you that the specified master page is a
One Page Master:

•

New Master Page Button – Allows you to create a new master page:

•

Trash Button – Allows you to trash or delete a selected master page
from the palette:

Note: The Palette Arrow allows you to obtain more options available
to a specific palette:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Removing the
Master Pages
tab

•

You can click and drag the Master Pages palette tab over an existing
group to add the palette to that group
OR click and drag the palette tab outside an existing group to create a
separate palette:

Selecting the
Master Pages
palette menu
commands

•

Select the arrow on the top right corner of the pallet window to display
the Palette Menu commands:

The Palette Menu commands are:
• New Master Page – allows you to create a new Master Page.
• Delete “Master Page” – allows you to delete Master Page.
• Duplicate “Master Page” – allows you to duplicate Master Page.
• Master Page Options – displays the Master Page Options dialog
box.
• Apply – displays the Apply Master dialog box.
• Save Page as – displays the Save Page as Master dialog box.
• Prompt on Apply – prompts you to confirm your choice every time
you want to apply a master page.
• Adjust Layout – allows the objects and guides on a page to be
repositioned or resized appropriately for the margins and columns of
the new master page you are selecting.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

5
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Creating Master Pages

• The New Master Page
dialog box allows you to
create your own new
Master Page.

Using the
New Master
Page dialog
box

•
•

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 3

The New Master Page dialog box allows you to create your own new
Master Page.
Choose New Master Page from the palette menu
OR click the New Master Page button to display the New Master
Page dialog box:

There are several ways to Create Master Pages in PageMaker. You
can create a new master page or create a master page based on an
existing master page or publication page.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

To create a new master page:
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Master Pages.
• Choose New Master Page from the palette menu
OR click the New Master Page button.
• Enter a name of your choice into the Name field.
• Select one of the radio buttons to specify if you would like a One Page
(single page) or a Two-Page (facing page) Master:

•
•
•

Specify the size of the Margins.
Specify the number of Columns, and the Space Between the
columns.
Click OK.
Note: If your publication is single-sided, you cannot use create a
spread master. See Setting Up Pages for more information on
creating single-sided or double-sided pages.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Using the
Save Page as
Master dialog
box

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

The Save Page as Master dialog box allows you to create a Master
Page based on an existing publication page.

•

Choose Duplicate “Master Page” from the palette menu to display
the Save Page as Master dialog box:

To create a new master from an existing publication page:
• Go to the Publication Page that you would like to use as a master
page.
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Master Pages.
• Choose Save Page As from the palette menu.
• Enter a name of your choice into the Name field.
• Click Save.
Note: The master elements from the master page applied to the
selected publication page, as well as objects and guides are all copied
to the new master page.
Using the
Duplicate
Master Page
dialog box

•

The Duplicate Master Page dialog box allows you to create a Master
Page based on an existing master page.

To display the Duplicate Master Page dialog box:
• Choose Duplicate “Master Page” from the Master Pages palette
menu:

To create a new master from an existing master page (Method One):
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Master Pages.
• Choose Duplicate “Master Page” from the palette menu.
• Select an existing master page from the Duplicate drop-down list.
• Enter a new name into the Name of New Master field.
• Click Duplicate.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

To create a new master from an existing master page (Method Two):
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Master Pages.
• Click and drag the master page name you would like to duplicate onto
the New Master Button:

•
•

Enter a new name into the Name of New Master field.
Click Duplicate.
Note: If you would like several master pages to share one or more
design attributes such as the location and formatting of page numbers,
you can apply the location and formatting of the page numbers you
would like to share on the other master pages into the Document
Master. When you are ready to create other master pages, you can
base the additional masters on the Document Master, rather than
wasting time creating each new master from scratch.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

9
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Applying Master Pages

•

To apply a master page to
several pages at once, you
need to use the Apply
Master dialog box.

Applying
Master Pages
to several
pages at
once

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 4

•

There are several ways to Apply Master Pages to your publication.

•

To apply a master page to several pages at once, you need to use
the Apply Master dialog box. Choose Apply from the Master Pages
palette menu to display the Apply Master dialog box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

To apply a master to multiple publication pages:
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Master Pages.
• Choose Apply from the palette menu.
• Select the name of the master from the Master Page drop-down list.
• In the Page Range field, specify a range of pages or select the All
radio button.
• Click Apply.
To apply different left and right masters to multiple pages in a double
sided publication:
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Master Pages.
• Choose Apply from the Master Pages palette menu.
• In the Page Range field, specify a range of pages or select the All
radio button.
• Check the Set Left and Right Pages Separately option.

•
•

Select the desired left side and right side masters from the Left
master page and Right master page drop-down lists.
Click Apply.
Note: If you want objects and guides on a page or a spread to be
repositioned or resized appropriately for the margins and columns of
the master page you are about to apply, select the Adjust Layout
checkbox. If you would not like to do this leave the checkbox
unchecked.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Applying a
Master Page
to one page
at a time

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

To change one page or spread at a time:
• Go to the publication page you want to change.
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Master Pages.
• Select the Adjust Layout from the palette menu if you want objects
and guides on a page or a spread to be repositioned or resized
appropriately for the margins and columns of the master page you are
about to apply. Otherwise, skip to step 4.
• Click your desired master icon or name from the Master Pages palette
list.
Note: If the Prompt on Apply command has been selected from the
palette menu, PageMaker will ask you to confirm your choice every
time you want to apply a master:
•

Click Yes in the dialog box to confirm your master page choice:

•

To prevent this message from appearing, deselect the Prompt on
Apply command from the palette menu.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Editing Master Pages

Editing Master Pages
• The Master Page Options
dialog box allows you to
edit the Name, Margins,
and Column Guides of an
existing master page.

Using the
Master Page
Options
dialog box

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 5

The Master Page Options dialog box allows you to edit the Name,
Margins, and Column Guides of an existing master page.

To display the Master Page Options dialog box:
• Choose Master Page Options from the palette menu
OR press the Ctrl key and click the Name of any unselected master
page you want to edit from the Palette list:

•

When you edit and remove a Master Page, the changes will instantly
take affect on the publication pages associated with the master.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

To adjust and rename a master page:
• Go to the publication page you want to change.
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Master Pages.
• Enter a new name into the Name field
• Enter the new Margins values.
• Enter the new Columns Guides values.
• Select the Adjust layout checkbox if desired and click OK.
Note: A Master Page can be edited in the same ways you would edit
a Publication Page. However, to change the margins and guides of a
master page, you have to use the Master Page Options command
from the master page palette menu, rather than the Document Setup
command from the File menu. The Document Setup will only adjust
the margins or the default Document Master.
Changing the
Column
Guides

•

There are several ways to change the Column Guides in a master
page:

•
•

You can make the changes in the Master Page Options dialog box.
You can adjust the column guides manually on the Master Page. You
cannot use this option to change the Number of columns, or Space
between columns.
You can also use the Layout > Column Guides command:

•

Note: If you hide your guides, you will not be able to select the
Column Guides command from the Layout menu.
Changing the
content of a
Master Page

•

Since the Master Page functions like a Publication Page, you can
modify any text, graphics, shapes or nonprinting guides on the
page. All the changes will instantly take affect on the publication
pages associated with the master.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Removing
Master Pages

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

To remove a Master Page and all it’s contents:
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Master Pages.
• Select the master page you want to delete.
• Choose Delete "Master Page" from the palette menu
OR click the Trash button.
• When the Confirmation prompt message appears, click Yes. If you
use the Trash button to delete a Master Page, you can bypass the
Confirmation prompt by pressing the Alt key before you click the
button.
• Click OK.
Note: When you delete a Master Page from a publication page,
PageMaker deletes the master, and then applies the None master to
all pages that had used the deleted Master.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

15
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Master Page Numbers

• The Page-Number Marker
allows you to place a
marker on a Master Page.
The marker will
automatically be update to
reflect the page number of
your Publication Page.

Adding
Page-Number
Markers to
Master Pages

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 6

The Page-Number Marker allows you to place a marker on a Master
Page. The marker will automatically update to reflect the page
number of your Publication Page. You can place a Page-Number
Marker on a Publication Page as well, but the marker will only work on
the page you placed it on. Instead, place the marker on the Master
Page to number all the pages in your publication.
If you have several Master pages, you will have to add a PageNumber Marker to all the Master Pages that you want a page number
to appear. You will also have to place a marker on both the Left and
Right sides of a Facing Page Master. The Page-Number Markers
display as a letter RM on Right Master, as a LM on the Left Master,
and as a page number on the Publication Page:

To add Page-Number Markers to a Master Page:
• Go to a Master Page that requires a marker.
• Select the Text tool from the tools palette.
• Create a Text Block.
• Press the Ctrl + Alt + P key combination.
• Add a prefix (such as the word: Page) to the page number marker.
• Format the text (if necessary). To keep the position and formatting of
your prefix and markers consistent, it is best to create a Document
Master with the markers in place, and then create the rest of your
Master Pages based on the Document Master.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Review Questions

How would
you:-

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 7

Display the Master Pages palette?
Use the Master Pages palette?
Remove the Master Pages tab?
Select the Master Pages palette menu commands?
Use the New Master Page dialog box?
Use the Save Page as Master dialog box?
Use the Duplicate Master Page dialog box?
Apply Master Pages to several pages at once?
Apply a Master Page to one page at a time?
Use the Master Page Options dialog box?
Change the Column Guides?
Change the content of a Master Page?
Remove Master Pages?
Add Page-Number Markers to a Master Pages?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

17
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Document Page Features
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Insert pages
Display the Insert Pages dialog box
Use the Insert Pages dialog box
Insert pages before you start a publication
Display the Sort Pages dialog box
Use the Sort Pages dialog box
Sort pages
Change the page numbering style
Use the Go to Page dialog box
Go back and forward
Use page icons to navigate
Use the Remove Pages dialog box
Use page icons to remove pages

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Document Pages

Document Pages
There are several ways to
Insert Pages in
PageMaker, the two most
common ways are:

•

1. To use the Insert Pages
command from the Layout
menu.
2. To right-click on the page
icon at the bottom of the
Publication Window.

Inserting
pages

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 8

There are several ways to Insert Pages in PageMaker, the two most
common ways are:
To use the Insert Pages command from the Layout menu:

To right-click on the page icon at the bottom of the Publication Window
and choose between: Add Two Pages to add two more pages to your
publication, or Insert Pages to display the Insert Pages dialog box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Displaying
the Insert
Pages dialog
box

•

19
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

The Insert Pages dialog box allows you to add new pages to a
publication. You can add pages before or after your current
publication page, and insert new pages between facing pages.

To display the Insert Pages dialog box:
• From the main menu, choose Layout > Insert Pages:

Using the
Insert Pages
dialog box

The available options in the Insert Pages dialog box are:
• Insert – allows inputting the number of pages you want to add to your
publication.
• Page Location – allows you to determine where you want to start
adding the pages. You can insert the pages Before the current page,
After the current page, or Between the Facing Pages:

•
•

Master Page – allows you to choose which master will be used on the
inserted pages.
Set left and right pages separately – if you check this option, it will
display a Left Master Page and Right Master Pages drop-down lists
that allow you to choose a different master for each side of the page:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

To insert a page:
• From the main menu, choose Layout > Insert Pages
OR right-click the Page Icon and select Insert Pages.
• Enter the number of pages you would like to add into the Insert field.
• Select the location where you want the pages to be added.
• Select a master to be applied to the added pages
OR check the Set left and right pages separately checkbox to select
the left and right pages separately.
• Click the Insert button.
Inserting
pages before
you start a
publication

•

When you are creating a new publication page, you have the option in
the Document Setup dialog box to enter the number of pages you
want in the publication and also the page number you want the
publication to start at:

•

Number of Pages – allows you to determine the number of pages you
want your publication to start with.
Start page # – allows you to determine what page number the
publication will start numbering from. If you enter 5 into the field the
first page in your publication will be page 5.
You can also use the File > Document Setup command to add pages
after you have already created your publication page.

•
•

Note: You cannot set which master pages will be applied to the added
pages; the default master will be the Document Master.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features

21
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Rearranging Pages

Rearranging Pages
• The Sort Pages dialog box allows
you to rearrange publication
pages in a way that does not alter
the text in a story.

Displaying
the Sort
Pages dialog
box

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 9

•

The Sort Pages dialog box allows you to rearrange publication pages
in a way that does not alter the text in a story. The story remains
intact even though text objects may move to different pages.

•

To display the Sort Pages dialog box:
From the main menu, choose Layout > Sort Pages:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the
Sort Pages
dialog box

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

The available options in the Sort Pages dialog box are:
• Enlarge button – enlarges the size of the thumbnails in the preview
window. You can also press the Alt + . key combination to enlarge the
preview:

•

Reduce button - reduces the size of the thumbnails in the preview
window. You can also press the Alt + , key combination to reduce the
preview:

•

Options button - opens up an Options dialog box:

•

Details button - this button will only be active when if you uncheck the
Show Detailed Thumbnails checkbox in the Options dialog box.
When the Show Detailed Thumbnails is uncheck, you will see all the
pages as a gray box, if you select one of the boxes, they will become
highlighted, once highlighted, you will be able to see a detailed
thumbnail of the selected page by clicking the Details button:
Details On:

Details Off:

•

Thumbnail preview window - displays your publication in either
detailed thumbnails or grayed out boxes (see above).

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Sorting
pages

23
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

To move a Single or Facing Page:
• From the main menu, choose Layout > Sort Pages.
• In the Sort Pages preview window, select either a single-sided page or
a pair of facing pages by clicking the page icons.
• Click and drag the selection to the location you want. When you click
and drag, you will notice the cursor changes to a loaded page icon.
• Click the OK button to change the page order.
To move one Page of a Facing Page:
• From the main menu, choose Layout > Sort Pages.
• To select one page in a pair of facing pages, press Ctrl and click the
page.
• Drag the selection to the location you want.
• Note: To insert a selection between a pair of facing pages, press Ctrl
while you click and drag the selection between the facing pages.
• Click the OK button to change the page order:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Page Numbers

• PageMaker allows you to
change the way in which
the pages are numbered in
the publication.

Changing the
page
numbering
style

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 10

PageMaker allows you to change the way in which the pages are
numbered in the publication.

To change the Page Numbering Style:
• From the main menu, choose File > Document Setup
OR press the Shift + Ctrl + P key combination
• Click the Numbers button in the Document Setup dialog box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

25
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

In the Page Numbering dialog box, select one of the 5 numbering
styles: Arabic Numeral, Upper Roman, Lower Roman, Upper
Alphabetic, and Lower Alphabetic:

•

Enter in a TOC and index prefix.
Note: A page-number prefix can be a number or letter, such as 1- or
A-, before the page number. You can use separate prefixes for page
numbers and page references when creating an index or table of
contents for a set of publications.

•

Click the OK button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Go to Page

Go to Page
• There are several ways to
navigate through the pages
in PageMaker 6.5.
• The best way to use all
depends on how far into
you publication you need
to go.
• To go to publication page
in a large publications (30
or more pages), use the Go
to Page dialog box.

Using the Go
to Page
dialog box

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 11

There are several ways to navigate through the pages in PageMaker
6.5. The best way to use all depends on how far into your publication
you need to go.

To go to a specific publication page in large publications (30 or more
pages), use the Go to Page dialog box:
• From the main menu, choose Layout > Go to Page
OR press the Ctrl + Alt + G key combination:

•

Enter the Publication Page or Master Page you want to go to in the
page fields:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Going back
and forward

27
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

To quickly go Back one single or facing page at a time:
• From the main menu, choose Layout > Go Back
OR press the Ctrl + Page Up key combination:

To quickly go Forward one single or facing page at a time:
• From the main menu, choose Layout > Go Forward
OR press the Ctrl + Page Down key combination:

Using page
icons to
navigate

•

You can also use the page icons at the bottom of the publication
window, to go to a page:

•

If you have a large publication and the page you want to go to is not
visible, click on the one of the arrows to the right or left of the page
icons, until the page becomes visible:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Remove Page

• To remove publication
pages using the Remove
Pages dialog box.

Using the
Remove
Pages dialog
box

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 12

To remove publication pages using the Remove Pages dialog box:
• From the main menu, choose Layout > Remove Pages:

•

To remove the desired pages, use the Remove Page(s) and the
Through fields to enter the first page you want to remove through to
the last page you want to remove:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Using page
icons to
remove
pages

•

29
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

You can also get to the Remove Pages dialog box by using the page
icons at the bottom of the publication window.

To remove pages using the page icons:
• Right-click the page icon.
• Select the Remove Pages option:

•
•

Enter in the first page you want to remove through to the last page you
want to remove.
Click the OK button.
Note: The page or pages that were highlighted when you right-click
and select the Remove Pages command will automatically be entered
into the page fields of the Remove Pages dialog box.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Review Questions

How would
you:-

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 13

Insert pages?
Display the Insert Pages dialog box?
Use the Insert Pages dialog box?
Insert pages before you start a publication?
Display the Sort Pages dialog box?
Use the Sort Pages dialog box?
Sort pages?
Change the page numbering style?
Use the Go to Page dialog box?
Go back and forward?
Use page icons to navigate?
Use the Remove Pages dialog box?
Use page icons to remove pages?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Working With Type
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Display the Control Palette
Use the Control Palette Paragraph View
Use the Control Palette to format text
Thread text
Thread Text Blocks
Thread Text Frames
Display the Paragraph Specifications dialog box
Use the Paragraph Specifications dialog box
Format paragraphs
Use the Paragraph Rules dialog box
Apply paragraph rules
Use the Paragraph Rules Options dialog box
Display the Styles Palette
Use the Styles Palette
Use the Styles Palette menu commands
Use the Style Options dialog box
Create styles
Create styles that apply to the next paragraph you type
Apply styles
Display the Indents/Tabs dialog box
Use the Indents/Tabs dialog box
Display the Bullets and Numbering dialog box
Edit bullets
Add a bulleted list to a paragraph
Add a numbered list to a paragraph
Remove bullets and numbering from a paragraph

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Control Palette Text Formatting

Control Palette Text Formatting
•

The Control palette allows you to change several
formatting options in one place rather than making repeat
trips to the Type menu.
Use the character Icon button to display the character View.

Use the paragraph Icon to display the Paragraph View.

Use the Apply Icon button to apply the changes you have made in the control palette.

Displaying
the Control
Palette

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 14

The Control Palette allows you to change several formatting options
in one place rather than making repeat trips to the Type menu.

To show or hide the Control palette:
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Control Palette
OR press the Ctrl + ‘ key combination.
to display the Character View:
• Select the Character View button

•

Select the Paragraph View button
View:

•

Select the Apply button to apply the changes you have made in the
Control Palette:

to display the Paragraph

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Using the
Control
Palette
Paragraph
View

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

The available options in the Control Palette Paragraph View are:
•

Style drop-down list – allows you to apply a style sheet to the text
you are formatting:

•

Alignment buttons – there are 5 alignment buttons to choose from.
The Left align, Right align, Center, Justify and Force Justify:

•

Cursor Position Indicator – allows you to track the horizontal
location of the cursor in a text block or text frame:

•

Left indent field – allows you to add an indent to the left side of your
paragraph:

•

First line indent field – allows you to add an indent to the left side of
the first line in a paragraph:

•

Right indent field – allows you to add an indent to the right side of
your paragraph:

•

Space before field – allows you to specify the amounts of space you
want to add before a Paragraph (not including the fist paragraph in a
Text block or frame):

•

Space after field – allows you to specify the amounts of space you
want to add after a Paragraph:

•

Grid Size options field – allows you to enter a size; measured in
points, into the field that will change the amount used by the Align to
Grid option. Adjusting the grid size will increase or decrease the
vertical space between paragraphs to help you align your selected
columns:

•

Align to Grid buttons – allow you to turn the Align to Grid option on
and off. The button to the right turn the option on:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the
Control
Palette to
format text

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

To format text in a Text Block or Text Frame:
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Control Palette.
• Select the Text Tool from the tools palette.
• Highlight the Text you want to format.
• From the Control Palette, select the Character or Paragraph view.
• Select the desired formatting options.
• Click Apply button to apply formatting.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

35
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Text Threads

Text Threads
• Text in PageMaker is part
of a story and each story
has to be placed into a text
block or text frame.
• When you have a story that
cannot fit onto one page,
you will have to Thread the
story over several pages,
or break it up into smaller
stories.

Threading
text

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 15

Text in PageMaker is part of a Story and each story has to be placed
into a Text Block or Text Frame. When you have a story that cannot fit
onto one page, you will have to Thread the story over several pages,
or break it up into smaller stories.
Breaking the story up into several stories can limit your ability to make
changes to the story later on:

If used properly Threading can save you a lot of time because you
have fewer stories to deal with.
Normally, text that you edit as a unit should be contained in a single
story. When you edit one article in a newsletter, for example, you
don't want other, unrelated articles to change.
Note: When adding, removing or formatting text that has been
Threaded, all the changes you make will effect how the rest of the
story flows. You may have to take a look at all the threaded stories to
make sure they are still flowing the way you want them to, so that
nothing is missing.
FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Threading
Text Blocks

•
•

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

When you are Threading imported text using a Text Block, you will
see a loaded text icon.
/ , you can use one of three options to
With the loaded text icon
thread the text.

To flow an entire story automatically:
• If the Automatic Text-flow icon does not display as a loaded text
icon, turn it on by choosing Layout > Autoflow from the main menu:

•
•

•

Place the loaded text icon where you would like the top of the first text
block to start.
Click to begin flowing the text:

The text will continue filling the Column or Publication Page, residing
within the page margins. Pages will be added automatically until the
text is finished flowing.

To flow one column of text at a time:
• If the Manual Text-flow icon does not display as a loaded text icon,
turn it off by choosing Layout > Autoflow from the main menu:

•

Place the loaded text icon where you would like the top of the first text
block start:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Click to begin flowing the text:
Note: Text will flow to the bottom of the page or column and then stop
flowing. The remainder of the text will remain in the text block. In
order to continue to flow the text, you will have to click on the Overset
text icon (the red arrow at the bottom of the text block or frame
handle), to display the loaded text Icon that is required to thread text:

•

Repeat above steps until the text has finished flowing.
Note: The text frame or text block handle will appear empty when
there is no more text to place.

To define an area in which to place text:
• Place the loaded text icon to the left corner of where you would like the
text block to start.
• Click and drag to define the text block area.
• Release the mouse button to flow the text into the defined area.
• Note: If there is more text than can fit into the text block, the rest of the
text will remain inside the Text Block. In order to continue to flow the
text, you will have to click on the Overset text icon, to display the
loaded text icon that is required to thread the text.
• Repeat above steps until the entire story is placed.
Note: To temporarily switch between Manual and Automatic text-flow,
hold down the Ctrl key as you click to place the text.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Threading
Text Frames

•
•

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Unlike Text Blocks, Text Frames must be threaded together manually.
When you delete a threaded frame, the text in the frame will move to
the next frame in the thread.
Text frames can be threaded whether or not they contain text.

To thread text frames:
• From the tools palette, select the Pointer tool.
• Select an empty frame or a text frame.
• Click the center of the bottom frame handle, to display the thread
icon:

•

Click the text frame you would like to thread to.
Note: When the frames are threaded, a Plus sign appears at the top
and or bottom of the text frame handles. The Plus sign indicate that
there is text before of after the selected frame. If the frame contains
more text to flow, the Overset icon will appear in the bottom frame
handle.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

39
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Working With Paragraphs

Working With Paragraphs
•

The Paragraph Specifications dialog box
allows you to apply many formatting
commands that are
not available on the
Control palette.

Displaying
the
Paragraph
Specification
s dialog box

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 16

The Paragraph Specifications dialog box allows you to apply many
formatting commands that are not available on the Control Palette.

To display the Paragraph Specifications dialog box:
• From the main menu, choose Type > Paragraph
OR press the Ctrl + M key combination:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Using the
Paragraph
Specification
s dialog box

The available options in the Paragraph Specifications dialog box are:
•
•
•
•
•

Indent: Left, First and Right
Paragraph Space: Before and After
Alignment: Left, Right, Center, Justify and Force Justify
Dictionary
Options:
Keep lines together
Column break before
Page break before
Include in table of contents
Keep with next
Window control
Orphan Control

Formatting
paragraphs

•

When you format a paragraph, your changes will affect the alignment,
indents, and the space before and after the paragraph.

To format a paragraph:
• From the tools palette, selected the Text tool.
• Point and click the mouse in a paragraph you want to format
OR highlight several paragraphs at once.
• From the main menu, choose Type > Paragraph.
OR press the Ctrl + M key combination.
• Select the desired formatting options.
• Click the OK button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Using the
Paragraph
Rules dialog
box

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

The Paragraph Rules dialog box allows you to add a horizontal rule
above or below a paragraph. The rules become part of the paragraph,
so if you move, or resize the text block or text frame the rule will also
be adjusted.

To display the Paragraph Rules dialog box:
• From the main menu, choose Type > Paragraph.
OR press the Ctrl + M key combination.
• Click the Rules button to open the Paragraph Rules dialog box:

Rule Above Paragraph - this checkbox is used to turn the rule above
the paragraph on or off.
Stroke Style - this drop-down list allows you to specify the weight or
style of a rule. Select the custom option to type in a weight (from 0 to
800 points) not available in the list.
Stroke Color - this drop-down list allows you to specify the color of the
rule.
Tint - this drop down list allows you to specify a tint of the rule color.
Width of Text - this radio button allows you to create a rule that starts
from the left indent to right indent or the end of the first line.
Width of Column - this radio button allows you to create a rule that
starts from the left side of the text block or frame to the right.
Left or Right Indent - these fields allow you to apply an indent for the
rule. The value entered in the Paragraph Rule field will not change the
paragraph indents.
Rule Below Paragraph - this checkbox is used to turn the rule below
the paragraph on or off.
Note: The options under the Rule Below Paragraph have the same
function as the options for the Rule Above Paragraph, described
above.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Applying
paragraph
rules

To apply a Paragraph Rule:
• From the tools palette, selected the Text tool.
• Point and click the mouse in a paragraph you want to format
OR highlight several paragraphs at once.
• From the main menu, choose Type > Paragraph.
OR press the Ctrl + M key combination.
• Click the Rules button.
• Check the Rule Above Paragraph and/or Rule Below Paragraph
checkbox.
• Define the desired stroke attributes and OK.

Using the
Paragraph
Rule Options
dialog box

•

With the Paragraph Rule Options you can set the space between the
paragraph and the rules.

To display the Paragraph Rule Options dialog box:
• From the main menu, choose Type > Paragraph.
OR press the Ctrl + M key combination.
Click the Options button to open the Paragraph Rule Options dialog
box:

Top - this field allows you to enter an amount (in inches) of the space
above the baseline of the first line in the paragraph before the rule.
Bottom - this field allows you to enter an amount (in inches) of the
space below the baseline of the last line in the paragraph before the
rule.
Align Next Paragraph to Grid - this checkbox allows you to align the
baselines of columns, so that the paragraph rules will align vertically.
Grid Size - allows you to match the leading of your body text.
Reset - this button allows you reset the amount in the Top and
Bottom fields to Auto.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

43
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Style Sheets

Style Sheets
• The Style Sheets contain
character and paragraph
formatting attributes, if
used properly, style sheets
can save you a lot of time
when it come to making
changes to a publication.

Displaying
the Styles
Palette

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 17

The Style Sheets contain character and paragraph formatting
attributes, if used properly, style sheets can save you a lot of time
when it come to making changes to a publication.
The Styles pallet allows you to view, apply, and edit styles. You can
copy or import style sheets from other applications.

To show or hide the Styles palette:
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Styles
OR press the Ctrl + B key combination:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the
Styles Palette

Using the
Styles Palette
menu
commands

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

[No Style] – allows you to remove a style from a paragraph or
selected text:

•

Style Name – allows you to organize and recognize your styles:

•

Plus Sign Icon – informs you that the paragraph containing the style
has been modifies since the style was last applied:

•

Disk Icon – informs you that a style was imported from another
publication:

•

New Style Button – allows you to create a new style:

•

Trash Button – allows you to trash or delete a selected style from the
palette:

•

Select the arrow on the top right corner of the Styles pallet window to
display the Palette menu commands:

The Styles Palette menu commands are:
• New Style - this command allows you to create new styles.
• Delete - this command allows you to delete styles.
• Duplicate - this command allows you to duplicate styles.
• Style Options - this command will display the Style Options dialog
box.
• Add HTML Styles - this command allows you to add HTML styles to
the list.
• Import Styles - this command allows you to Import styles from a
word-processor or other publications.
• Display Overridden Icons - this command allows you to turn on or off
the display of the plus sign icon.
• Display Imported Icons - this command allows you to turn on or off
the display of the disk icon.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Using the
Style Options
dialog box

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

The Style Options dialog box allows you to create and edit Styles.

To display the Style Options dialog box:
• Choose New Style from the palette menu
OR click the New Style button
OR choose Style Options from the palette menu:

•
•
•
•

Name - this field used to name your styles.
Based on - this drop-down list allows you to select currently available
styles to base your style on.
Next style - this drop-down list allows you to select the style that will
be used by the paragraph that follows the one that you currently
working on.
Char Button - this button will display the Character Specifications
dialog box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

Para button - this button will display the Paragraph Specifications
dialog box:

•

Tab button - this button will display the Indents/Tabs dialog box:

•

Hyph button - this button will display the Hyphenation dialog box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

47
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Creating
styles

To create a new style:
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Styles.
• From the Styles palette menu, select the New Style command
OR click the New Style button.
• In the Name field, enter the desired style name.
• From the Based On drop-down list, select No Style.
• To choose the character attributes that you want, click the Char button
to display the Character Specifications dialog box.
• To choose the paragraph attributes that you want, click the Para
button to display the Paragraph Specifications dialog box.
• To set up the tabs and indents that you want, click Tabs button to
display the Indents/Tabs dialog box.
• To define how you would like the paragraphs to be hyphenated, click
the Hyph button to display the Hyphenation dialog box.
• Click the OK button.

Creating
styles that
apply to the
next
paragraph
you type

To create a style that will apply to the next paragraph you type:
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Styles.
• From the Styles palette menu, select the New Style command
OR click the New Style button.
• In the Name field, enter the desired style name.
• From the Based On drop-down list, select the style you want to
precede the Next Style.
• From the Next Style drop-down list, choose the name of the style you
want to follow this paragraph style.
• Click the OK button.

Applying
styles

To apply a style using the Styles palette:
• From the tools palette, selected the Text tool.
• Point and click the mouse in a paragraph you want to format
OR highlight several paragraphs at once.
• On the Styles palette, click the name of the style you want to apply.
To apply a style using the Control palette:
• From the tools palette, selected the Text tool.
• Point and click the mouse in a paragraph you want to format
OR highlight several paragraphs at once.
• In the Paragraph View of the Control palette, select the name of the
style you would like to apply.
• Click the Apply button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Indents and Tabs

Indents and Tabs
•

The Indents/Tabs dialog
box allows you to set tabs
and indents to style sheets,
text blocks and text frames.

Displaying
the
Indents/Tabs
dialog box

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 18

The Indents/Tabs dialog box allows you to set tabs and indents to
style sheets, text blocks and text frames. The dialog box includes the
Left and Right tab, Center tab, decimal tab, Leader field, and Position
field.

To display the Indents/Tabs dialog box:
• From the main menu, choose Type > Indents/Tabs
OR press the Ctrl + I key combination:

Note: If you highlight the text before you open the Indents/Tabs dialog
box, the ruler at the bottom of the dialog box will be adjusted to fit the
text, and the zero begin at the left most point of the text block or text
frame.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Using the
Indents/Tabs
dialog box

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Left tab - allows you to set tab stops inward from the left margin of the
text box:

•

Right tab - allows you to set tab stops inward from the right margin of
the text box:

•

Center tab - allows you to set tab stops that center the text to the
center of the tab:

•

Decimal tab - allows you to set tabs that line up numbers by their
decimal point:

•

Leader Box - allows you to specify a leader style for a tab stop:

•

Position Box - allows you to see the indentation or tab amount. Can
also be used to Add, Delete, Move or Repeat a tab.

•
•

Reset - allows you to restore the tabs settings to default.
Apply - allows you to preview your changes before you click the OK
button to confirm the changes.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Bullets and Numbering

Bullets and Numbering
•

When creating a numbered or
bulleted list, you can do it
manually by adjusting the
tabs and indents to create
the effect, but that is too time
consuming, PageMaker had
given you a plug-in that make
creating numbered and
bulleted list easy.

Displaying
the Bullets
and
Numbering
dialog box

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 19

When creating a numbered or bulleted list, you can do it manually by
adjusting the tabs and indents to create the effect, but that is too time
consuming. PageMaker had given you a plug-in that makes creating
numbered and bulleted lists easy.

To display the Bullets and Numbering dialog box:
• From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Bullets and
Numbering:

Note: Click the Bullets or Numbers buttons to toggle between the
Bullet style and the Numbering Style.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Editing
bullets

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

If you click the Edit button from the Bullet style options, you will
display the Edit Bullet dialog box:

•

The Edit bullet dialog box allows you to customize your bullets by
choosing you own fonts, and type size:

•

The Character display, gives you a sample of what all the usable
characters from the specified font look like:

•

The Example display gives you a sample of what the selected bullet
will look like. The example displays the selected character in its
specified font size:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Adding a
bulleted list
to a
paragraph

To add a bulleted list to a paragraph:
• Either click an insertion point in paragraph you want change or
highlight the range of paragraphs.
• From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Bullets and
Numbering.
• Click the Bullets button, to display the bullet options if it is not already
displayed.
• Click one of the 5 bullet characters that are displayed.
• Click the Edit button to enter the Edit Bullet dialog box
and choose the desired font style and font size
OR to choose another character to use as a bullet.
• Click the OK button.
• Make any changes you would like in the Range option.
• Click the OK button.

Adding a
numbered list
to a
paragraph

To add a numbered list to a paragraph:
• Either click an insertion point in paragraph you want change or
highlight the range of paragraphs.
• From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Bullets and
Numbering.
• Click the Numbers button, to display the number options if it is not
already displayed.
• Select a Numbering Style.
• Choose a Separator, if you would like one of the 4 available
characters to be inserted to the right of the number and the tab before
the paragraph
OR choose None if no separator is required.
• Indicate what number you want to start at in the Start at field.
• Make any changes you would like in the Range option.
• Click the OK button.
Note: The numbers will not automatically be updated, so these
techniques should only be used when the paragraphs require no more
changes.

Removing
bullets and
numbering
from a
paragraph

•

If you would like to Remove the bullets that you have added to the
paragraph, you can do it manually, but that is practical if you have only
a few to work on.

To Remove bullet or numbered lists from several paragraphs all at
once:
• Click the Remove button from the Bullets and Numbering dialog
box:

•

Click the OK button to confirm the Remove command.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type

53
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Review Questions

How would
you:-

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 20

Display the Control Palette?
Use the Control Palette Paragraph View?
Use the Control Palette to format text?
Thread text?
Thread Text Blocks?
Thread Text Frames?
Display the Paragraph Specifications dialog box?
Use the Paragraph Specifications dialog box?
Use the Paragraph Rules dialog box?
Apply paragraph rules?
Use the Paragraph Rules Options dialog box?
Display the Styles Palette?
Use the Styles Palette?
Create styles?
Create styles that apply to the next paragraph you type?
Apply styles?
Display the Indents/Tabs dialog box?
Use the Indents/Tabs dialog box?
Display the Bullets and Numbering dialog box?
Edit bullets?
Add a bulleted list to a paragraph?
Add a numbered list to a paragraph?
Remove bullets and numbering from a paragraph?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text Objects and Stories
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

55
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Text Objects and Stories
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Display the PageMaker word processor
Use the Story Editor
Display the Spelling dialog box
Use the Spelling dialog box
Check spelling
Deal with misspelled or unknown words
Display the Find dialog box
Use the Find dialog box
Display the Change dialog box
Use the Change dialog box
Find and replace text

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text Objects and Stories

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Story Editor

Story Editor
• You can edit the text or Story in
your publication, in the
PageMaker Layout view,
or with the built in
PageMaker word
processor, when you
use the Story Editor.

Displaying
the
PageMaker
word
processor

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 21

You can edit the text or Story in your publication, in the PageMaker
Layout view, or with the built in PageMaker word processor, when
you use the Story Editor.
The Story Editor allows you to edit text, check spelling, find and
replace text, and apply style sheets.

To open the story editor window:
• From the main menu, choose Edit > Edit Story
OR press the Ctrl + E key combination:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text Objects and Stories
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Using the
Story Editor

•

57
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

The Story Editor is only used to edit text, all other none text elements
will remain in the Layout view. Once you have made your changes,
you can return to the Layout view to see how your changes have been
applied.
Use the Ctrl + E shortcut to quickly toggle between the Layout view
and the Story Editor.

To work a specific story in story editor:
• Using the Text tool or the Pointer tool, select a text block or text frame
that you would like to edit.
• From the main menu, choose Edit > Edit Story
OR press the Ctrl + E key combination.
• Make the necessary changes to the text or story.
• When you are finished with the Story Editor, choose Edit > Edit
Layout
OR press Ctrl + E to return to the Layout view.
Note: If you use the Pointer tool to select the text element, you can
open the Story Editor by triple clicking the selected text element.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text Objects and Stories

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Spell Checking

Spell Checking
• Before you print your
publication, it is a good
idea to check your spelling.
• You can only check the
spelling in the Story Editor.
You can check for basic
grammatical error or
correct the spelling of a
selected story or an entire
publication.

Displaying
the Spelling
dialog box

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 22

Before you print your publication, it is a good idea to check your
spelling.
You can only check the spelling in the Story Editor. You can check
for basic grammatical error or correct the spelling of a selected story
or an entire publication.

To display the Spelling dialog box:
• From the main menu, choose Edit > Edit Story
OR press the Ctrl + E key combination.
• Then from the Story Editor main menu, choose Utilities > Spelling
OR press the Ctrl + L key combination:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text Objects and Stories
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Using the
Spelling
dialog box

59
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

The options available in the Spelling dialog box are:
• Change to – this field allows you to see the misspelled word,
OR if you select one of the replacement spellings, the field will display
the selected replacement.
• Change To or Alternate Spellings – allows you to choose one of the
suggested replacements spelling from the list (if the alternate spelling
checkbox has been checked).
Options:
• Alternate Spellings - allows you to see suggested replacements for
misspelled words.
• Show Duplicates - allows you to detect duplicate words, such as “the
the”.
Search Document:
• Current Publication - allows you to specify to search only the current
publication for errors.
• All Publications - allows you to specify to search all open publications
for errors.
Search Story:
• Selected Text - allows you to only search your selected text for errors.
• Current story only - allows you to only search the current opened
story for errors.
• All stories - allows you to search all open stories in the publication.
Buttons:
• Ignore - allows you to ignore unknown words, that you feel are spelled
correctly.
• Replace - allows you to replace misspelled words.
• Add - allows you to add an unknown word to the dictionary
Note: If you choose to check the spelling in all open publications,
PageMaker will automatically search all of the stories in those
publications as well.

Checking
spelling

•

When PageMaker finds a misspelled, unknown or duplicated word,
the word is highlighted in the story editor, and also appears in the
Change to field of the Spelling dialog box.

To check the spelling in one or more publications:
• Using the Text or Pointer tool, select the text you would like to check.
• From the main menu, choose Edit > Edit Story
OR press the Ctrl + E key combination.
• Select a range of text to be checked or just place the insertion into the
text to check the entire story.
• From the Story Editor main menu, choose Utilities > Spelling
OR press the Ctrl + L key combination.
• Select any of the Options settings that you would like to use.
• Note: If you deselect the options settings, you will speed-up the spell
checking process.
• Select any of the Search Document options you would like to use.
• Select one of the Search Story options to specify the scope of your
search.
• Click the Start button to begin checking for errors.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text Objects and Stories

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Dealing with
incorrectly
spelt or
unknown
words

•

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

As PageMaker finds unknown, misspelled words or other possible
errors, you will be given the opportunity to decide what happens
before you proceed to the next word.

When unknown, incorrectly spelt or other possible errors are found:
• Click the Ignore button to continue checking without making any
change to the word. If a word is ignored once, PageMaker will
automatically ignore the word then next time it appears in the story
during the check.
• Click the Replace button if you have made a correction to the word in
the Change to field, or have selected an alternate spelling from the
available list.
• Click the Add button if you want PageMaker to add the unknown word
in the user dictionary. When a word is added, it will not appear again
during the remainder of the check.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text Objects and Stories
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

61
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Finding and Changing Words

Finding and Changing Words
•

If you are trying to find a
specific word or set of
characters in a story, the best
way to do this is to use the
Find option.

Displaying
the Find
dialog box

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 23

If you are trying to find a specific word or set of characters in a story,
the best way to do this is to use the Find option.

To display the Find dialog box:
• From the main menu, choose Edit > Edit Story
OR press the Ctrl + E key combination.
• Then from the Story Editor main menu, choose Utilities > Find
OR press the Ctrl + F key combination:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text Objects and Stories

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Using the
Find dialog
box

The options available in the Find dialog box are:
• Find What - this field allows you to specify the word you want to find.
Options:
• Match Case - allows you to look for only the text that matches the
case that you entered in the Find what field.
• Whole Word - allows you to look for only words that match the word
you have entered in the Find what field. This option is very useful
when you are looking for words that can be found within other words
such as “in” (find, twin, spelling).
Search Document:
• Current Publication - allows you to specify to search only the current
publication to look for the word.
• All Publications - allows you to specify to search all open publications
to look for the word.
Search Story:
• Selected text - allows you to only search the selected text for the
word.
• Current story - allows you to only search the current opened story for
the word.
• All stories - allows you to search all the open stories in the publication
for the word.
Buttons:
• Find - allows you to begin the search.
• Char Attributes - allows you to search for a specific type of character
formatting.
• Para Attributes - allows you to search for a specific type of paragraph
formatting.

Displaying
the Change
dialog box

•

If you are trying to find and replace a specific word or set of characters
in a story, the best way to do this is to use the Change option.

To display the Change dialog box:
• From the main menu, choose Edit > Edit Story
OR press the Ctrl + E key combination.
• Then from the story editor main menu, choose Utilities > Change
OR press the Ctrl + C key combination:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text Objects and Stories
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Using the
Change
dialog box

63
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

The options available in the Change dialog box are:
• Find What - this field allows you to specify the word you want to find.
• Change To - this field allows you to specify the word you want to
change the found words to.
Options:
• Match Case - allows you to look for only the text that matches the
case that you entered in the Find what field.
• Whole Word - allows you to look for only words that match the word
you have entered in the Find what field. This option is very useful
when you are looking for text that can be found within other words
such as “in” (find, twin, spelling)
Search Document:
• Current Publication - allows you to specify to search only the current
publication to look for the text.
• All Publications - allows you to specify to search all open publications
to look for the text.
Search Story:
• Selected Text - allows you to only search the selected text for the
word.
• Current Story Only - allows you to only search the current opened
story for the word.
• All Stories - allows you to search all the open stories in the
publication for the word.
Buttons:
• Find - allows you to begin the search.
• Change - allows you to change the found text.
• Change & Find - allows you to make the change and find the next
occurrence of the selected text.
• Change All - allows you to do an auto find and change on all the
occurrences of the selected text.
• Char Attributes - allows you to search for specific type of character
formatting.
• Para Attributes - allows you to search for specific types of paragraph
formatting.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text Objects and Stories

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Finding and
replacing text

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

To find and change text:
• Using the Text or Pointer tool, select the text you would like to check.
• From the main menu, choose Edit > Edit Story
OR press the Ctrl + E key combination.
• Select a range of text to be checked or just place the insertion into the
text to check the entire story.
• From the Story Editor main menu, choose Utilities > Change
OR press the Ctrl + C key combination.
• In the Find What field, enter the text you want to find.
• In the Change To field, enter the text you want to change the found
text to.
• Select the Options settings that apply to your search.
• Select one of the Search document settings that apply to your
search.
• Select one of the Search story settings that apply to your search.
• Click the Find button to begin the search.
As PageMaker finds the selected text, you will be given the opportunity
to decide what happens before you proceed to the next occurrence of
the text
When selected text is found:
• Click the Change button to just change that one occurrence, and then
click the Find button again to continue the search.
• Click the Change & Find button to change the found occurrence and
continue to the next occurrence.
• Click the Change All button to change every occurrence of the
selected text. Only use this if you are sure that the search will only
change the selected text.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Text Objects and Stories

65
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Review Questions

How would
you:-

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 24

Display the PageMaker word processor?
Use the Story Editor?
Display the Spelling dialog box?
Use the Spelling dialog box?
Check spelling?
Deal with misspelled or unknown words?
Display the Find dialog box?
Use the Find dialog box?
Display the Change dialog box?
Use the Change dialog box?
Find and replace text?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Dictionary

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Dictionary
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•

Add words to the User Dictionary
Add words using the Spelling dialog box

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Dictionary

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Adding Words

Adding Words
• There are two ways to add
words to the User
Dictionary in PageMaker:
1. When you are checking the
spelling in your publication,
you can Add the unrecognized
words to the User Dictionary.
2. When you are examining
hyphenation of words in your
publication, you can Add the
words to the User Dictionary.

Adding
words to the
User
Dictionary

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 25

There are two ways to add words to the User Dictionary in
PageMaker:
•
•

•

When you are checking the spelling in your publication, you can Add
the unrecognized words to the User Dictionary.
When you are examining hyphenation of words in your publication,
you can Add the words to the User Dictionary. To display the
Hyphenation dialog box, choose Type > Hyphenation from the main
menu.
When you select the Add button in the Spelling dialog box or in the
Hyphenation dialog box, you will display the Add Word to User
Dictionary dialog box:

Note: You can make minor spelling and hyphenation corrections
within PageMaker, but for more extensive changes, you will need to
use the Dictionary Editor utility.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Dictionary

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Adding
words using
the Spelling
dialog box

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

To add a word to your User Dictionary from the Spelling dialog box:
• Open the Spelling dialog box.
• Either enter a word into the Change to field, or Start the spellchecking process:

•
•

When the desired word appears in the Change to field, select the Add
button, to display the Add Word to User Dictionary dialog box.
Make sure the word you are adding is spelled correctly and check the
hyphenation breaks.
Note: The hyphenation breaks are represented by the tildes (~):
One tilde indicates the most preferable place for a hyphen to occur.
Two tildes indicate the next preferable place for a hyphen to occur.
Three tildes indicate a poor yet acceptable place for a hyphen to
occur.

•
•

From the Dictionary list, select the dictionary to which you want to
add the word.
Select one of the Add radio buttons that apply to the word you are
adding:
As All Lowercase option allows you to add the word to the dictionary
in its generic form, that way PageMaker will accept capitalization at the
beginning of a sentence.
Exactly As Typed option will store the word so that it will only be
accepted when it is capitalized as you have typed it.

•

Click the OK button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Dictionary

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Review Questions

How would
you:-

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 26

Add words to the User Dictionary?
Add words using the Spelling dialog box?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Color Management

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Color Management
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Use the EPS import filter to import colors
Edit imported colors
Control imported colors
Use EPS imported colors
Display Pantone color libraries
Add Pantone colors

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Color Management

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Importing Colors

Importing Colors
• You can choose which
colors are imported when
you place EPS graphics
containing color
information.

Using the
EPS import
filter to
import colors

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 27

•

You can choose which colors are imported when you place EPS
graphics containing color information. Since EPS files contain
embedded color information, the control provided by PageMaker may
limit the colors that are added to your publication.

•

When you are importing EPS graphics containing color information, an
EPS Import Filter dialog box will appear. The dialog box allows you
to determine how the colors in the graphic will be imported into your
publication:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Color Management

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•
•
•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Add Process and High Fidelity Color Names to Palette – this
option allows you to add the process and high fidelity colors from the
EPS graphic to the Colors palette.
Add Spot Color Names to Palette - this option allows you to ensure
that PageMaker imports the proper color information, so that you will
get accurate color separations when you print the EPS graphic.
Exclude Spot Color Names - this option will convert the spot colors in
the EPS graphic to process colors when the graphic is printed.
Note: When you are printing your publication to a PostScript printer,
all the changes made to imported EPS spot colors will only be applied
if the Preserve EPS Colors option in the Print Color dialog box is
deselected.

Editing
imported
colors

To edit spot colors imported from an EPS graphic:
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Colors.
• Press Ctrl and click the name of the color you want to have edited.
• Edit the percentages of the CMYK or RGB color components to
change the definition of a spot color
OR choose Process from the color Type drop-down list to turn the
spot color into a process color.
• Click OK button to save your changes.
Note: When converting Spot colors to Process colors, the accuracy
of the conversion will depend on the color. In most cases the colors
do not exactly match that of the original spot colors.

Controlling
imported
colors

To control the colors imported from an EPS graphic:
• From the main menu, choose File > Place.
• Select the EPS file you would like to import.
• Press the Shift key and double-click the file name
OR select the Show Filter Preferences option in the Place dialog box
and open the selected file.
• In the EPS Import filter dialog box, select options to specify the kinds
of colors you want to include.
Note: When you import an EPS with colors that are the same as the
colors already found in your list, an alert prompt will display and ask
you to decide whether or not you want to add the duplicate color. If
you say yes (ok) the color in your list will be substituted, and if you say
no (cancel), the color will not be added to you list.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Color Management

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using EPS
imported
colors

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

You can apply colors imported from an EPS file to objects created in
PageMaker, grayscale bitmaps, and 1 bit (black and white)
bitmaps.

•

Once the colors have been imported, they are added to the colors
list. They are marked with a PS to indicate that they are colors the
came from a Postscript or EPS files.
You can also apply color to an EPS image; however, the color change
will not take effect on screen, but rather when the publication is
printed.

•

Note: When a color that has been applied to an EPS image is
removed from the colors list, PageMaker uses the embedded color
information found in the placed image to create the needed color
separations.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Color Management

75
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Working With Pantones

Working With Pantones
• If used properly Pantone
colors can save you
money, while allowing you
to add color to your
publication.

Displaying
Pantone
color libraries

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 28

If used properly Pantone colors can save you money, while allowing
you to add color to your publication.

To display the Pantone color library:
• From the Color Options dialog box, select the Libraries drop-down
list and choose the desired Pantone Library:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Color Management

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Adding
Pantone
colors

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Pantone libraries drop-down list:

To add Pantone colors from the library to the Colors list:
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Colors
OR press the Ctrl + J key combination.
• Click the New Color button at the bottom of the Colors palette
OR choose New Color from the palette menu.
• Select a Pantone color from the Libraries drop-down list in the Color
Options dialog box.
• Select a color from the Color Picker dialog box by either clicking on it
OR by typing its name into the Pantone field:

•
•

Click the OK button to return to the Color Options dialog box.
Click the OK button again, to save the color to the list.
Note: If the Pantone libraries do not appear in the drop down list,
either the color picker file or the individual library information files are
in the incorrect location on your hard drive or on your network.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Color Management

77
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Review Questions

How would
you:-

•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 29

Use the EPS import filter to import colors?
Edit imported colors?
Control imported colors?
Use EPS imported colors?
Display Pantone color libraries?
Add Pantone colors?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Pictures
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Use the EPS import filter to place EPS images
Use Photoshop Effects
Add Plug-ins to the Effects list
Apply Effects to images
Use Keylines
Add a Keyline to objects
Display the Links Manager
Use the Links Manager
Update Links
Unlink images
Mask images
Unmask images

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Importing EPS Images

Importing EPS Images
• When it comes to importing
images into PageMaker,
EPS files are the most
flexible graphic file type to
use.
• They can be used for
Vector artwork such as 2D
logos, or Bitmaps. They
can also contain Clipping
paths extra colors that be
used in PageMaker.

Using the
EPS import
filter to place
EPS images

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 30

When it comes to importing images into PageMaker, EPS files are the
most flexible graphic file type to use.
They can be used for Vector artwork such as 2D logos, or Bitmaps.
They can also contain Clipping paths, or extra colors that can be
used in PageMaker:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

To import an EPS graphic file:
• From the main menu, choose File > Place.
• Select the EPS file you would like to import.
• Press the Shift key and double-click the file name
OR select the Show Filter Preferences option in the Place dialog box
and open the selected file.
• In the EPS Import filter dialog box, select preview options you want to
use for the imported graphic:

Preview Options:
• Create preview if none exists - allows you to generate a preview
only if the preview do not exist.
• Always create preview – allows you to generate a preview in all
cases.
For Created Preview:
• If you are printing to a non-PostScript printer, you can experiment with
values greater than the 72 dpi default setting (the optimum value
depends on your printer's dpi setting).
Color Depth:
• Here, you should select Millions of Colors option. Another reason to
use higher resolution and greater color depth is if you are exporting to
HTML or PDF (where the exported image is derived from the screen
preview).

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Photo Effects

Photo Effects
• You can use Photoshop
plug-ins to enhance CMYK
or RGB TIFF images in
PageMaker.

Using
Photoshop
Effects

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 31

•

You can use Photoshop plug-ins to enhance CMYK or RGB colored
TIFF images in PageMaker.

•

Only plug-ins from Adobe Photoshop version 3.0.4 or higher will
work. The Adobe Gallery Effects® will automatically be installed with
PageMaker.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

To display the Photoshop Effects dialog box:
• From the main menu, choose Element > Image > Photoshop Effects
OR right-click the image and select the Photoshop Effects command:

Adding Plugins to the
Effects list

To add a Plug-in to the Effects list:
• Copy the desired plug-ins to the PageMaker RSRC folder, on your
hard drive.
If the plug-in is valid, when you restart PageMaker, the plug-in will
become added to the effects list.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Applying
Effects to
images

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

To apply a Photoshop Effect to an image:
• Select a CMYK or RGB colored TIFF image from the publication.
• From the main menu, choose Element > Image > Photoshop Effects
OR right click the image and select the Photoshop Effects command.
• In the Save new file as field, type a new file name for the image you
are applying the effect to so as not to damage the original image.
• Select a Plug-in filter from the drop-down list.
• Click the OK button.
• When the filter-specific dialog box appears, adjust the setting if you
so desire.
• Click the OK button.
Note: Some plug-ins may need more Memory (RAM) than the
PageMaker system configuration requires. Choosing a memory
intensive plug-in may freeze you system if you do not have enough
RAM to complete the task.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

85
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Keylines

Keylines
• Adding borders or
Keylines has been made
easy. To do this manually
requires too many precise
steps, and you would have
to group the Keyline with
the graphic to move it
around.

Using
Keylines

•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 32

Adding borders or Keylines has been made easy. To do this
manually requires too many precise steps, and you would have to
group the Keyline with the graphic to move it around.
You can add Keylines to several objects at once.
You can also use Keyline command to change or remove Keylines.

To display the Keyline dialog box:
• From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Keyline:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Adding a
Keyline to
objects

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

To add a Keyline to an object:
• Select the desired object(s) (do not include groups).
• From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Keyline.
• In the Extends field, type the amount you would like the Keyline to
extend out from the object's bounding box, before the border is
applied.
• Depending on how you would like the Keyline to appear (in relation to
the object), select the Bring keyline to front of object or select the
Send keyline behind object radio buttons.
• Click the Attributes button to display the Fill and Stroke dialog box:

•
•

Set the desired Fill and Stroke attributes such as the stroke weight
and the fill or stroke color and tint.
Click the OK button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

87
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Links

Links
• When you update a link,
the current internal version
of the linked object is
replaced.

Displaying
the Links
Manager

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 33

•

When you update a link, the current internal version of the linked
object is replaced. When both the internal and external version of a
linked object have been modified, PageMaker allows you to discard
the internal copy.

•

If PageMaker cannot locate an image being used in the publication,
you will need to use the Links Manager to update the link.

To display the Links Manager dialog box:
• From the main menu choose File > Links Manager
OR press the Shift + Ctrl + D key combination:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the
Links
Manager

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

The Links Manager displays a list of the images being used in your
publication.

•

Missing links are represented by a “?” and modified links are
represented by an “X” or an inverted question mark:

•

Info button - allows you to display the Link Info dialog box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

Updating
Links

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Options button - allows you to display the Link Options dialog box:

To manually update a file:
• From the main menu, choose File > Links Manager.
• Select an object from the list.
• Click the Update button.
To simultaneously update all linked files:
• From the main menu, choose File > Links Manager.
• Click the Update All button.
• Click the OK button.
Note: This option is only available for objects that are set to Update
Automatically.

Unlinking
images

•

You can Unlink Images from their original file. Usually to prevent the
imported image from being updated when the original files is modified.

To unlink an object:
• From the main menu, choose File > Links Manager.
• From the list, select the object that you want to unlink.
• Click the Unlink button.
• Click OK button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Masks

Masks
Masked

• If you want to cover a part
of an object or create nonrectangular keylines, you
can use the Mask
command to create the
effect.
Unmasked

Masking
images

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 34

If you want to cover a part of an object or create non-rectangular
Keylines, you can use the Mask command to create the effect.

To mask an image:
• Draw a box over the image you would like to Mask.
• Select the image you want to Mask and the box you want to use to
Mask the image:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

From the main menu, choose Element > Mask
OR press the Ctrl + 6 key combination to Mask the image:

•

Click the image and adjust the way it fits into the box:

•

Group the image and the Mask so they move as one object.
Note: Press Shift and then choose Element > Mask and Group to
group and mask in one step.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Unmasking
images

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

To unmask an image:
• Select the masking object or the masked object:

•

From the main menu, choose Element > Unmask
OR press the Shift + Ctrl + 6 key combination:

Note: Press Shift and then choose Element > Unmask and Ungroup
to ungroup and unmask in one step.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures

93
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Review Questions

How would
you:-

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 35

Use the EPS import filter to place EPS images?
Use Photoshop Effects?
Add Plug-ins to the Effects list?
Apply Effects to images?
Use Keylines?
Add a Keyline to objects?
Display the Links Manager?
Use the Links Manager?
Update Links?
Unlink images?
Mask images?
Unmask images?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Multiple Objects
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

95
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Working With Multiple Objects
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Add Inline graphics to text
Use text wrap controls
Wrap text around a graphic
Customize a text wrap
Restore custom boundaries
Wrap text around another text block
Display the Layers palette
Use the Layers palette
Select the Layers palette menu commands
Add new layers
Change target layer
Rearrange layers
Merge layers
Remove layers
Lock objects
Unlock objects
Lock layers
Unlock layers

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Multiple Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Text and Graphics

Text and Graphics
•

You can add graphics into
a paragraph, by placing
the graphic into the text
frame or text block.

Adding Inline
graphics to
text

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 36

You can add graphics into a paragraph, by placing the graphic into the
text frame or text block. This is called the Inline graphic.
The Inline graphic will move along with the text, but you can only
move the baseline of where the picture sits, and if you scale the
picture, it will only change the spacing of the text on the line that it has
been placed on.

To import an image into a text object:
• Select the Text tool.
• Place the curser into a line of text or a paragraph.
• From the main menu choose File > Place
OR press the Ctrl + D key combination.
• Select the desired graphic.
• Select the As inline graphic command in the Place dialog box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Multiple Objects
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•
•

97
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Open the desired graphic.
The image will now reside inside the text object:

Note: Since an Inline graphic is considered a change to an internal
copy of a story, it will be removed if you update the link of the story
with a newer version.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Multiple Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Text Wrap

Text Wrap
•

There are several controls
you have available to
control the way text is
affected by a placed
graphic.

Using text
wrap controls

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 37

There are several controls you have available to control the way text is
affected by placed graphic. Wrapping text is one of the best ways to
create visual impact in a publication.
The Text Wrap Control allows you to determine how the text will wrap
around a graphic object.

The three main ways to wrap text are:
• To allow the text to cover the graphic object.
• To allow the text to wrap around the sides of a rectangular shaped
object.
• To allow the text to wrap around the sides of an irregular shaped
object:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Multiple Objects
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Wrapping
text around a
graphic

99
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

To wrap text around a graphic:
• Select a graphic or image.
• From the main menu, choose Element > Text Wrap
OR press the Ctrl + Alt + E key combination.
• Click the Middle Wrap Option. (The rightmost icon is not available
unless you have customized the text wrap, as described later.)
• Specify the desired Text Flow option:
The first (leftmost) Text Flow icon allows text to jumps over a graphic
and continues the text on the next page or column.
The second (middle) Text Flow icon allows text to jump over a graphic
and continue on the same page below the graphic.
The third (rightmost) Text Flow icon allows you to create a rectangular
text wrap around all the sides of a graphic.
•
•
•

Customizing
a text wrap

In the Standoff in inches fields, enter the values for the boundary to
determine the distance of the text from each side of the graphic.
Select the Wrap Text on Same Layer Only option if you want text on
other layers to ignore the text wrap.
Click the OK button.

To customize text wrap around a graphic:
• Apply text wrap as described above.
• Selected the graphic.
• Click on the graphics boundary where you want the handle to appear
to add a new handle. Repeat this for as many handles as you want.
OR
Click and drag the handles or line segments to reshape the boundary
and hold down the Shift as you drag, to constrain the vertical or
horizontal movement of the handles.
OR
Click and drag a handle onto an adjacent handle to delete a handle.
Note: Hold down the spacebar to temporarily prevent text from
rewrapping while you make your adjustment. Release the spacebar
to allow the text to wrap.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

100

Working With Multiple Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Restoring
custom
boundaries

To restore a custom boundary back to a rectangular boundary:
• Select the graphic you would like to restore.
• From the main menu, choose Element > Text Wrap.
• Click the Middle Text Wrap option icon:

Wrapping
text around
another text
block

To wrap text around another text block:
• Select the text block around which you want text to wrap.
• From the main menu, choose Element > Group. The selected text
block will now be treated as a graphic.
• Selected the grouped text block.
• Apply the available text wrap option:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Multiple Objects

101
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Layers

Layers
•

•

The advantage of using
layers is the ability to
work on a publication and
only focus on the content
that pertains to the layer
you are working on.
You can hide or lock
layers so that you do not
accidentally make
changes or get distracted
by elements of other
layers.

Displaying
the Layers
palette

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 38

•

The advantage of using Layers is the ability to work on a publication
and only focus on the content that pertains to the layer you are
working on. You can hide or lock layers so that you do not
accidentally make changes or get distracted by elements of other
layers.

•

When working with Layers, any new object created in the publication
will be placed onto the layer selected in the Layers palette.
To show or hide the Layers palette:
From the main menu, choose Window > Show Layers
OR press the Ctrl + 8 key combination:

•

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

102

Working With Multiple Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the
Layers
palette

Selecting the
Layers
palette menu
commands

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

Default Layer – this layer is the default working layer found in all
publications:

•

Layer Name – allows you to organize and recognize your layers:

•

Small Dot Icon – informs you of which layer a selected object is on:

•

Show Layer Icon – informs you of which layers are visible or invisible:

•

Lock Layer Icon – informs you of which layers are locked or
unlocked:

•

New Layer Button – allows you to create a new layer:

•

Trash Button – allows you to trash or delete a selected layer from the
palette:

•

Select the arrow on the top right corner of the Layers palette window
to display the Layers palette menu commands:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Multiple Objects
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

103
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

The Layers palette menu commands are:
• New Layer - this command allows you to create new layers.
• Delete - this command allows you to delete layers.
• Merge Layers - this command allows you to merge layers together.
• Layer Options - this command will display the Layer Options dialog
box.
• Show All / Hide Others - this command allows you to unhide all the
layers or hide all of the layers but the one you have selected.
• Unlock All / Lock Others - this command allows you to unlock all of
the layers or lock all of the layers but the one you have selected.
• Paste Remembers Layering - this command allows you to paste cut
or copied objects on the same layer they came from.
• Select Target Layer - this command allows you to select all objects
that are used by a selected layer.
• Delete Unused Layers - this command allows you to remove unused
layers.
Adding new
layers

To create a new layer:
• From the Layers palette menu, select New Layer:

OR click the New Layer button:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

104

Working With Multiple Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

Enter the desired Name or the New Layer:

•
•
•

Select a color from the Color drop-down list.
Check or uncheck the Show layer or Lock layer options.
Click the OK button:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Multiple Objects
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

105
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Changing
target layer

To change the target layer of an object:
• Select the desired object.
• Click and drag the small dot from current targeted layer to the new
targeted layer:

Rearranging
layers

To rearrange layers:
• Select the layer you would like to move.
• Click and drag the layer to the new desired location on the list:

Note: Press Ctrl to select multiple layers. The selected layers will
maintain their layer order relative to each other.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

106

Working With Multiple Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Merging
layers

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

To merge layers together:
• Select two or more layers which you would like to merge, using the
Ctrl key to select multiple layers:

•

From the layers palette menu, select the Merge Layers command:

•

The resulting merged layer is now displayed:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Multiple Objects
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Removing
layers

•

107
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

When Removing Layers, it is important to remember that each layer
appears on every page of a publication.
Note: Before you remove a layer, hide all of the other layers, and go to
each page to make sure you will not be removing any needed content
from your publication.

To remove a layer:
• Select the layer name in the Layers palette:

•

From the layers palette menu, choose Delete "Layer name":

OR click the Trash button:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

108

Working With Multiple Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

In the Delete Layer dialog box, select the Move Items to, and choose
the name of the layer to which you want the objects to move to.
OR select Delete Items on All Pages From Layer(s) to remove all
objects throughout the publication assigned to that layer:

•

Press the OK button:

Note: To bypass the Delete Layer dialog box and delete the layer and
all its content, hold down Alt key as you complete select the delete
command or click the trash button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Multiple Objects

109
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Locking

Locking
•

•

You can Lock objects into
place in order to prevent
them from being resized,
or moved.
When an object is locked,
you will see a little lock
icon appear if you try to
move the object.

Locking
objects

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 39

•

You can Lock objects into place in order to prevent them from being
resized, or moved.

•

When an object is locked, you will see a little lock icon appear if you
try to move the object:

To lock an object:
• Select the object you would like to lock.
• From the main menu, choose Element > Lock Position
OR press the Ctrl + L key combination.
Unlocking
objects

•

The Unlocking command undoes the Lock Position command,
allowing you to move the selected object.

To unlock an object:
• Select the locked object.
• From the main menu, choose Element > Unlock
OR press the Ctrl + Alt + L key combination.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

110

Working With Multiple Objects

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Locking
layers

•

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

You can Lock layers to prevent their content being edited.

To lock a layer:
• Select the layer you would like to lock.
• Click on the box to the left of the layer name on the Layers palette:

Unlocking
layers

•

The layer is now marked with non-editable icon.

•

In order to be able to edit the contents of a layer, you will have to
Unlock it.

To unlock a layer:
• Select the locked layer you would like to unlock.
• Click on the box to the left of the layer name again on the Layers
palette:

•

The layer without non-editable icon is now unlocked.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Multiple Objects

111
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Review Questions

How would
you:-

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 40

Add Inline graphics to text?
Use text wrap controls?
Wrap text around a graphic?
Customize a text wrap?
Restore custom boundaries?
Wrap text around another text block?
Display the Layers palette?
Use the Layers palette?
Select the Layers palette menu commands?
Add new layers?
Change target layer?
Rearrange layers?
Merge layers?
Remove layers?
Lock objects?
Unlock objects?
Lock layers?
Unlock layers?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PostScript Printing

113

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PostScript Printing
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Print Reader’s Spreads
Tile pages
Automatically Tile pages
Manually Tile pages
Scale pages
Print bleeds
Print Non-Printing objects
Create Non-Printing elements
Display Non-Printing items

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

114

PostScript Printing

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Printing Spreads

Printing Spreads
•

The Reader’s Spreads
command allows you to
print the left and right
pages of a document at the
same time, on the same
page.

Printing
Reader’s
Spreads

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 41

The Reader’s Spreads command allows you to print the left and right
pages of a document at the same time, on the same page.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PostScript Printing

115

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

When you choose the Reader’s Spreads option, the page orientation
changes from portrait to landscape:

Note: When printing reader spreads, you will need to select a printer
with a page size that can print both pages side by side. If no such
printer is available you will have to Tile or Scale the publication in
order to see both pages together.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

116

PostScript Printing

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Tiling and Scaling

Tiling and Scaling
•

When you print your
publication, your printer
may not be able to print
the page size you have
specified in your
document setup. To print
these type of publications
PageMaker provides you
with the Tiling and Scaling
options.

Tiling pages

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 42

When you print your publication, your printer may not be able to print
the page size you have specified in your Document setup. To print
these types of publications PageMaker has provides you with the
Tiling and Scaling options.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PostScript Printing

117

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

The Tiling drop-down list allows you to choose one of three options:
None - allows you to turn off page Tiling.
Auto - allows PageMaker to calculate the number of pages required to
print the publication.
Manual - allows you to control the exact dimensions of the tiles:

Automatically
Tiling pages

To automatically tile a publication:
• From the main menu, choose File > Print.
• Select a PostScript printer from the printer drop-down list.
• Select the PPD for your printer type.
• Set any other option from the Print Document dialog box that may
apply to your publication such as page range, non-printing setting
and orientation:

•
•

Click the Paper button.
Select Auto from the Tiling drop-down list.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

118

PostScript Printing

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

•
•

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

In the Overlap field, set the overlap to an amount that is grater than
the minimum printer page margin value (consult the printer manual if
you do not know the amount) and less than half the size of the
smallest dimension of your document size.
Check the Fit preview to see how many tiled sheets per page you will
need:

Set any other option from the Print Options, Print Color, and Print
Features dialog boxes that apply to your publication.
Click the Print button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PostScript Printing

119

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Manually
Tiling pages

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

To manually tile a publication:
• Reset the zero point to the upper-left corner of the page you want to
tile, making sure to leave enough room for the Overlap and/or
Printer’s Marks and Page Information.
• From the main menu, choose File > Print.
• Select a PostScript printer from the printer drop-down list
• Select the PPD for your printer type.
• Set any other option from the Print Document dialog box that may
apply to your publication such as page range, non-printing setting
and orientation.
• Click the Paper button.
• Select Manual from the Tiling drop-down list.
• Check the Fit preview for information about the publication you are
tiling:

•
•
•

Set any other option from the Print Options, Print Color, and Print
Features dialog boxes that apply to your publication.
Click the Print button.
To manually print additional tiles, repeat steps 1 through 4, and click
the Print button.
Note: If the zero point does not move, it may be locked. From the
main menu, choose Layout > Guides and Rulers > Zero Lock to
unlock the zero point.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

120

PostScript Printing

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Scaling
pages

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

The Scaling command allows you to fit an oversized publication on a
smaller piece of paper.

•

You can scale your publication:
Manually, by entering a specified amount in the percentage (%) field
of the Print Paper dialog box
OR
Automatically, by using the Reduce to fit option to allow PageMaker
to scale the publication to fit the paper.

To scale a publication:
• From the main menu, choose File > Print.
• Select a PostScript printer from the printer drop-down list.
• Select the PPD for your printer type.
• Set any other option from the Print Document dialog box that may
apply to your publication such as page range, non-printing setting
and orientation.
• Click the Paper button.
• Enter in a value from 5 to 1600 into the Scale percentage field
OR click Reduce to Fit to auto scale your publication to fit onto the
selected paper size:

•
•

Set any other option from the Print Options, Print Color, and Print
Features dialog boxes that apply to your publication.
Click the Print button.
Note: Not all devices can scale from 5 to 1600; check your printer
manual for the range of scaling that is supported.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PostScript Printing

121
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Page Bleeds

Page Bleeds
•

A Page Bleed is the area outside
the publication page. It is used
when you have an object or fill
that extends to the size of the
page.

Printing
bleeds

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 43

A Page Bleed is the area outside the live publication page. It is used
when you have an object or fill that extends to the size of the page.

To print pages with bleeds:
• From the main menu, choose File > Print.
• Select a PostScript printer from the printer drop-down list.
• Select the PPD for your printer type.
• Set any other option from the Print Document dialog box that may
apply to your publication such as page range, non-printing setting
and orientation.
• Click the Paper button.
• Check the Printer’s Marks option.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

122

PostScript Printing

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

Check the Crops and Bleeds Only option:

•

If your page size is not large enough to fit the bleed, scale your
publication page.
Set any other option from the Print Options, Print Color, and Print
Features dialog boxes that apply to your publication.
Click the Print button.

•
•

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PostScript Printing

123

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Printing What You Cannot See

Printing What You Cannot See
•

•

Non-Printing objects are
objects that are set to be
hidden from the final
output.
Setting objects as NonPrinting allows you to
attach notes or comments
to the publication without
having them appear on the
printed page.

Printing
Non-Printing
objects

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 44

Non-Printing objects are objects set to be hidden from the final output.
•

Setting objects as Non-Printing, allows you to attach notes or
comments to the publication without having them appear on the
printed page.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

124

PostScript Printing

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

To print objects that are set to Non-printing:
• From the main menu, choose File > Print.
• Select a PostScript printer from the printer drop-down list.
• Select the PPD for your printer type.
• Set any other option from the Print Document dialog box that may
apply to your publication such as page range, and orientation.
• Check the Ignore “Non-Printing” setting checkbox:

•
•

Set any other option from the Print Paper, Print Options, Print
Color, and Print Features dialog boxes that apply to your publication.
Click the Print button:
Note: It is a good idea to check View > Display Non-Printing Items
when you open a publication, that way you know if there are any
hidden objects that may affect the final print.

Creating
Non-Printing
elements

To make an object non-printing:
• Select the object you want to make non-printing.
• From the main menu, choose Element > Non-Printing.

Displaying
Non-Printing
items

To view or hide non-printing objects:
• From the main menu, choose View > Display Non-Printing Items:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PostScript Printing

125
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Review Questions

How would
you:-

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 45

Print Reader’s Spreads?
Tile pages?
Automatically Tile pages?
Manually Tile pages?
Scale pages?
Print bleeds?
Print Non-Printing objects?
Create Non-Printing elements?
Display Non-Printing items?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Adobe PageMaker 6.5
Intermediate Level
Exercise Workbook

C C T G L O B A L

.C O M

Courseware Release Version 5.0

INSTALLING THE SAMPLE FILES INTO A FOLDER ....................................................................... 1
INSTALLING THE SAMPLE FILES ................................................................................................................... 1
MASTER PAGES......................................................................................................................................... 3
USING THE MASTER PAGES PALETTE.......................................................................................................... 3
CREATING MASTER PAGES ......................................................................................................................... 4
APPLYING MASTER PAGES ......................................................................................................................... 6
NUMBERING MASTER PAGES ...................................................................................................................... 7
DOCUMENT PAGE FEATURES ............................................................................................................ 11
INSERTING DOCUMENT PAGES .................................................................................................................. 11
NAVIGATING PAGES ................................................................................................................................. 13
REMOVING PAGES .................................................................................................................................... 16
WORKING WITH TYPE ......................................................................................................................... 17
THREADING TEXT ..................................................................................................................................... 17
WORKING WITH PARAGRAPHS ................................................................................................................. 21
WORKING WITH BULLETS AND NUMBERS ................................................................................................ 22
TEXT OBJECTS AND STORIES ............................................................................................................ 25
FINDING AND CHANGING WORDS ............................................................................................................. 25
DICTIONARY............................................................................................................................................ 27
ADDING WORDS ....................................................................................................................................... 27
COLOR MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................................................ 29
IMPORTING COLORS .................................................................................................................................. 29
PICTURES.................................................................................................................................................. 33
APPLYING PHOTO EFFECTS ....................................................................................................................... 33
INSERTING KEYLINES................................................................................................................................ 35
WORKING WITH MULTIPLE OBJECTS............................................................................................ 37
USING LAYERS.......................................................................................................................................... 37
POSTSCRIPT PRINTING ........................................................................................................................ 45
PRINTING SPREADS ................................................................................................................................... 45
TILING AND SCALING ................................................................................................................................ 46
PRINTING BLEEDS ..................................................................................................................................... 48

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Installing the Sample Files into a Folder
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

1
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Installing the Sample Files into a Folder
Installing the sample files
•
•

•

Use the Windows Explorer to create a folder called PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples,
just below the My Documents folder.
If you are installing the sample files from a diskette, place the diskette in the diskette drive
and copy the files to the My Documents \ PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples folder. If
these files have been copied to your network server, then ask your trainer/supervisor for
more information about how to copy these files to your PC’s hard disk.
Notes for tutors:
The above instructions are for Windows 95 - and for Windows 98 that has not been setup for
a multi-user environment (with individual profiles). The instructions above may also require
modification within a Windows NT environment. Where possible pre-install the relevant work
files prior to use by students/delegates

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Master Pages
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

3
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Master Pages
Using the Master Pages Palette
•
•
•
•

Use the Windows Explorer to create a folder called PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Work
Folder, just below the My Documents folder.
Start the PageMaker 6.5 application.
Press the Ctrl + N key combination, to create a New Publication page.
Enter the following settings in the Document Setup dialog box and OK:

•
•

Hide all the visible palettes, with the exception of the Tools palette.
From the main menu, choose Window > Show Master Pages:

•

Click and drag the Master Page Tab out so that the palette window is not being shared with
another palette:

•

Close the remaining palettes so that you only have the Master Pages palette and the Tools
palette visible.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Creating Master Pages
•
•

From the Master Pages palette menu, select the New Master Page command.
Enter the following settings into the New Master Page dialog box:

•

Click the OK button:

•

Click the New Master Page icon in the Master Pages palette:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Master Pages
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

5
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Enter the following settings into the New Master Page dialog box:

•

Click the OK button:

•

Save your publication as Intermediate Exercise 1.p65 in the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate
Work Folder.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Applying Master Pages
•

Still in the Intermediate Exercise 1.p65 file, from the Master Pages palette menu, make
sure that the Prompt on Apply command is unchecked:

•

Select the Page 1 page icon at the bottom left of the Publication Window:

•

Click the Letter Head master from the Master Pages palette to apply the master to Page 1:

•

Press the Ctrl + S key combination to save your progress.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Master Pages
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

7
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Numbering Master Pages
•

Still in the Intermediate Exercise 1.p65 file, select the Master Page icon at the bottom left of
the Publication Window:

•

Select the Intermediate Master to switch the Master Page view:

•
•

Select the Text tool.
Place the text pointer at the bottom left corner of the Left Master Page, just above the
guides.
Note: You may need to zoom-in into the bottom left corner of your publication for better view:

•
•
•

Type the word Page (press the space bar after the word) as a prefix into the text block.
Press the Ctrl + Alt + P key combination to apply the Left Page Marker.
Highlight the entered text.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Master Pages - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•
•

Press the Ctrl + ‘ key combination to show the Control palette.
With the Control palette in the Character View, format the entered text with the following
settings:

•

Click the Apply button to make sure all the settings are applied:

•
•

Select the Pointer tool.
Click and drag the Text Block until it snaps to the lower left guides:

•

Release the mouse button:

•
•

Click and drag the Text Block to the bottom right corner of the Right Master Page.
Before you release the mouse button, press the Ctrl + Alt key combination to create a
Duplicate Text Block:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Master Pages
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

9
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

With the Ctrl + Alt keys still pressed, release the mouse button when the Text Block snaps
into place:

•
•
•

Select the Text tool again.
Click inside the duplicated Text Block.
Change the Control palette view to the Paragraph View:

•

Click the Right Alignment button:

•
•
•
•
•

Click the Apply button if you do not see the change take place.
Hide the Master Pages and Control palettes.
Press the Ctrl + S key combination to save your progress.
Press the Shift + Ctrl + S key combination to open the Save dialog box.
Save the publication as a Template file in the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Work Folder:

•
•

Close the publication.
Open the Intermediate Exercise 1.p65 and Intermediate Exercise 1.T65 files from the
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples folder to see an example.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Document Page Features
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

11
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Document Page Features
Inserting Document Pages
•
•
•
•

Open the Intermediate Exercise 1.T65 template file from the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate
Work Folder.
Click on the Page 1 icon.
From the main menu, choose Layout > Insert Pages.
Enter the following settings into the Insert Pages dialog box:

•
•
•

Press the Insert button.
Right click on the Page 2/3 icon.
Select the Add Two Pages command:

•
•

Right click the Page 4/5 icon.
Select the Insert Pages command:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

Enter the following settings into the Insert Pages dialog box:

•

Click the Insert button:

•
•

Press the Ctrl + S key combination.
Save the publication as Intermediate Exercise 2.p65 into the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate
Work Folder.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Document Page Features
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

13
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Navigating Pages
•
•

Still in the Intermediate Exercise 2.p65 file, from the main menu, chose Layout > Go to
Page.
Enter the following settings into the Go To Page dialog box and OK:

•
•
•

Press the Ctrl + Shift + 8 to display the Master Pages palette.
From the Master Pages palette menu, select the Master Page Options command.
Enter the following change to the Master Page Options dialog box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

Click the OK button:

•
•

Select the Rectangle tool.
Draw a box in fit into the right column guides of the Left Master Page:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Document Page Features
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

15
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Press the Ctrl + J key combination to show the Colors palette:

•
•
•
•
•

Fill the box in Red.
From the Tint drop down list, choose a 10% tint.
Fill the Stroke in None.
Select the Pointer tool.
Click and drag a duplicate box (using the Ctrl + Alt key combination) to the left column of
the Right Master Page:

•
•
•

Hide the Colors and Master Pages palettes.
Click on the Page 6/7 icon.
Save your progress.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Document Page Features - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Removing Pages
•
•

Still in the Intermediate Exercise 2.p65 file, right click the Page 6/7 icon.
Select the Remove Pages command:

•

Enter the following settings into the Remove Pages dialog box and OK:

•

Click the OK button again when you see the Remove pages and all their contents prompt:

•

Notice that the page 7 is removed:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Go to page 2.
Press the Ctrl + S key combination to save your progress.
Press the Shift + Ctrl + S key combination to open the Save dialog box.
Save the publication as a Template file in the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Work Folder.
Close the publication.
Open the Intermediate Exercise 2.p65 and Intermediate Exercise 2.T65 files from the
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples folder to see an example.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Working With Type
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

17
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Working With Type
Threading Text
•
•

•
•
•

Open the Intermediate Exercise 2.T65 template file from your PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate
Work Folder.
From the main menu, choose Layout > Autoflow to make sure that the Autoflow command
is unchecked:

Press the Ctrl + D key combination to open the Place dialog box.
Open the Filler Text 02.RTF file from the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples folder.
Place the Loaded Text icon at the top left corner of the far left column on Page 2:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

Click the mouse button to place the text:

•
•
•
•

Press the Ctrl + S key combination.
Save the publication as Intermediate Exercise 3.p65 in the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate
Work Folder.
Select the Text tool, and click on the placed text.
Press the Ctrl + A key combination to select all the text in the story:

•
•

Show the Control palette.
Enter the following settings into the Control palette, Character View:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Working With Type
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

19
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•
•
•

Click the Apply button to confirm your settings, and leave the text highlighted.
From the main menu, choose Type > Paragraph.
Enter the following settings into the Paragraph Specifications dialog box and OK:

•
•

With the Pointer tool, select the placed text.
Click on the Overset Text icon to continue Manually Threading the text:

•

Place the Loaded Text icon into the next column and press the mouse button:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•
•

Click on the Overset Text icon to display the loaded text icon again.
Hold down the Ctrl key, and place the Autoflow Loaded Text icon at the top left corner of
the first column of Page 3:

•

Click the mouse button to Autoflow the all of the Overset text:

•
•

Go back to Page 2.
Save your progress.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Working With Type
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

21
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Working With Paragraphs
•
•
•
•

•
•
•

Still in the Intermediate Exercise 3.p65 file, make sure both pages 2 and 3 are visible.
With the Text tool selected, place the cursor at the far top left corner of the first column in
Page 2 B (just in front of the first line of text).
Hold down the Shift key.
While still holding the Shift key, click at the lower right corner of the last column on Page 3,
leaving only the last two paragraphs unselected:

Now with the two pages still highlighted, press the Ctrl + M key combination.
Press the Rules button, in the Paragraph Specifications dialog box.
Enter the following settings into the Paragraph Rules dialog box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•
•

Press the Options button.
Enter the following settings into the Paragraph Rule Options dialog box:

Top:
Bottom:
•
•
•

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

0.19
0.063

Click the OK button, and continue to click the OK button until you return to your publication
(should only be three clicks).
Go to page 4.
Save your progress.

Working With Bullets and Numbers
•

Still in the Intermediate Exercise 3.p65 file, select the first three paragraphs in the first
column of Page 4:

•
•

From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Bullets and Numbering.
Press the Numbers button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Working With Type
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

23
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Enter the following settings into the Numbers option of the Bullets and Numbering dialog
box and OK:

•

Select the last three paragraphs in the first column of Page 4:

•
•

From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Bullets and Numbering.
Select the Bullets button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Type - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

Enter the following settings into the Bullets option of the Bullets and Numbering dialog box
and OK:

•
•
•
•
•

Save your progress.
Press the Shift + Ctrl + S key combination.
Save the publication as a Template file in the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Work Folder.
Close the publication.
Open the Intermediate Exercise 3.p65 and Intermediate Exercise 3.T65 files from the
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples folder to see an example.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Text Objects and Stories
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

25
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Text Objects and Stories
Finding and Changing Words
•
•
•
•
•
•

Open the Intermediate Exercise 3.T65 file from your PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Work
Folder.
Go to page 2.
With the Pointer tool, select the first column.
From the main menu, choose Edit > Edit Story.
From the Story Editor menu, choose Utilities > Change.
Enter the following settings into the Change dialog box:

•
•

Click the Find Button.
When you have found the first instance, click the Change all button:

•
•
•
•

Close the Change dialog box.
Close the Story Editor window.
Press the Shift + Ctrl + S key combination to open the Save dialog box.
Save the publication as Intermediate Exercise 4.p65 in the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate
Work Folder.
Repeat step 11 and Save the publication as a Template file in the same folder.
Close the publication.
Open the Intermediate Exercise 4.p65 and Intermediate Exercise 4.T65 files from the
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples folder to see an example.

•
•
•

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Dictionary
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

27
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Dictionary
Adding Words
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

Open the Intermediate Exercise 4.T65 template file from the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate
Work Folder.
With the Pointer tool, select the fist column on Page 2.
Press the Ctrl + E key combination to open the Story Editor.
Press the Ctrl + L key combination to open the Spelling dialog box.
Click the Start button in the Spelling dialog:

If you do not see word Mommy as the first Unknown word, click the Ignore button to skip
the misspelled words until you get to the word Mommy.
When the word Mommy appears in the Change to field, click the Add button:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Dictionary - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•
•

Look at how the word will be hyphenated.
Check the to make sure the following have been set and OK:

•
•
•

Press the Ctrl + E key combination to Exit the Story Editor.
Press the Ctrl + S key combination to save your progress.
Save the publication as Intermediate Exercise 5.p65 in the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate
Work Folder.
Close the publication.

•

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Color Management
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

29
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Color Management
Importing Colors
•
•
•
•

Open the Intermediate Exercise 5.p65 file from the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Work
Folder.
Go to page 1.
Select the Master Page Icon.
Show the Colors palette:

•
•

Press the Ctrl + D key combination to open the Place dialog box.
Open the Logo - Pantone.eps file from the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples folder.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Color Management - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

Place the image onto the page:

•

Take a look at the Colors palette, there should be some new PANTONE colors added to the
list:

•
•

Hide the Colors palette.
Select the Rectangle tool.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Color Management
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

31
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Draw a box from the top left corner of the margin to the bottom right corner of the margin:

•
•

From the main menu, choose Element > Fill and Stroke.
Enter the following settings into the Fill and Stroke dialog box and OK:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Color Management - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

Save your progress:

•
•
•
•

Press the Shift + Ctrl + S key combination to open the Save dialog box.
Save the publication as a Template file in the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Work Folder.
Close the publication.
Open the Intermediate Exercise 5.p65 and Intermediate Exercise 5.T65 files from the
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples folder to see an example.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Pictures
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

33
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Pictures
Applying Photo Effects
•
•
•
•

Open the Intermediate Exercise 5.T65 template file from the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate
Work Folder.
Press the Ctrl + D key combination to open the Place dialog box.
Open the Colors.tiff file from the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples folder.
Click the Yes button, on the Image Size prompt:

•

Click the mouse button to place the image onto the page:

•

With the placed image still selected, from the main menu, choose Element > Image >
Photoshop Effects.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

Enter the following settings into to the Photoshop Effects dialog box:

•
•

Once you select an effect, click the OK button.
Adjust the settings of the effect that you will be using:

•

If you do not like the effect you have chosen, repeat steps 6 through 9, and change your
effect choice.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Pictures
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

35
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

When you are happy with the effect, click the OK button to apply the effect:

•
•

Press the Ctrl + S key combination to save your progress.
Save the publication as Intermediate Exercise 6.p65 in the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate
Work Folder.

Inserting Keylines
•
•
•

Still in the Intermediate Exercise 6.p65 file, with the Pointer tool, select the placed
Colors_efx.tif image on the page.
From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Keyline.
Enter the following settings into the Keyline dialog box:

•

Click the Attributes button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Pictures - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

Enter the following settings into the Fill and Stroke dialog box and OK twice to close both
dialog boxes:

•

With the image still selected, use the Control palette to scale the image to 30%:

•

Place the image at the lower right corner of the page, inside the colored box:

•
•
•
•
•

Press the Ctrl + S key combination to save your progress.
Press the Shift + Ctrl + S key combination to open the Save dialog box.
Save the publication as a Template file in the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Work Folder.
Close the publication.
Open the Intermediate Exercise 6.p65 and Intermediate Exercise 6.T65 files from the
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples folder to see an example.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Working With Multiple Objects
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

37
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

Working With Multiple Objects
Using Layers
•
•

Open the Intermediate Exercise 6.T65 template file from the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate
Work Folder.
From the main menu, choose Window > Show Layers:

•
•

From the Layers palette menu, select the New Layer command.
Enter the following settings into the New Layer dialog box and OK:

•

Click the New Layer icon at the bottom on the layers palette:

•

Enter the following settings into the New Layer dialog box and OK:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Multiple Objects - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•
•

Click the New Layer icon again.
Enter the following settings into the New Layer dialog box and OK:

•

Click and drag the Frame layer to the very bottom of the list (below the Default layer):

•

With the Pointer tool, select the Colored Box, and the image with the keyline on the page.
Note: remember to use the Shift button to select multiple images:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Working With Multiple Objects
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

39
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

With the two objects selected, click and drag the Small colored Dot on the right of the
Default layer to the Frame layer:

•

Notice that the Logo image has now been revealed:

•
•

Select the Logo image.
Click and drag the Small colored Dot from the Default layer to the Logo Layer:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Multiple Objects - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

Click the Lock Layer box, to lock the Frame layer:

•
•
•

Select the Text layer.
From the Layers palette menu, select the Layer Options command.
Enter the following Change to the Layers Option dialog box and OK:

•
•

Click and drag the Default layer to the top of the list.
Click and drag the Picture Bkg layer to the bottom of the list:

•
•

Press the Ctrl + D key combination to open the Place dialog box.
Open the Background.jpg file from the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples folder:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Working With Multiple Objects
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

41
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Click the mouse button and place the image:

•

Using the Control palette, enter the following settings:

•
•

Click the Apply button (if needed) to apply your changes.
Lock the Picture Bkg layer:

•
•

With the Pointer tool, select the Logo image.
Using the Control palette, select the center Reference point of the Proxy:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Multiple Objects - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•

Enter the following settings:

•

Click the Apply button to confirm you settings:

•
•

Lock the Logo layer.
Select the Default layer:

•
•
•

Go to page 1.
Press the Ctrl + S key combination to save your progress.
Save the publication as the Intermediate Exercises 7.p65 in the PageMaker 6.5
Intermediate Work Folder.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES - Working With Multiple Objects
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

43
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•
•

With the Default layer still selected, choose Rectangle Frame tool from the tools palette.
Draw a frame that is the same size as the colored box (use the guides to help you):

•

With the frame still selected, press the Ctrl + Alt + F key combination to open the Frame
Options dialog box.
Enter the following settings into the Frame Options dialog box and OK:

•

•
•
•

Press the Ctrl + U key combination to open the Fill and Stroke dialog box.
Set the frame to have a Fill of None and a Stroke of None and OK.
With the frame still selected, press the Ctrl + D key combination to open the Place dialog
box.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Working With Multiple Objects - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

•
•

Open the Letter.txt file from the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples folder.
Enter the following settings into the Text-only import filter and OK:

•
•

With the Text tool, select all the text in the frame (use the Ctrl + A key combination).
With the Control palette in Character view, enter the following settings:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Press the Apply button (if needed) to apply your changes.
Press the Ctrl + S key combination to save your progress.
Press the Shift + Ctrl + S key combination to open the Save dialog box.
Save the publication as a Template file in the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Work Folder.
Close the publication.
Open the Intermediate Exercise 7.p65 and Intermediate Exercise 7.T65 files from the
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples folder to see an example.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES – PostScript Printing

45
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

PostScript Printing
Printing Spreads
•
•
•
•

Open the Intermediate Exercises 7.p65 file from the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Work
Folder.
Go to page 2.
Press the Ctrl + P key combination to open the Print Document dialog box.
Enter the following settings into the Print Document dialog box:

Printer:
PPD:
Copies:
Range:
Reader’s spreads:
Orientation:
•

Any available Postscript Printer
Any available PPD for the Postscript Printer
1
2-5
Checked
Landscape

Click the Paper button and continue with the next exercise.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PostScript Printing - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Tiling and Scaling
•

Still in the Intermediate Exercises 7.p65 file, enter the following settings into the Print
Paper dialog box:

•
•

Click the Options button.
Enter the following settings into the Print Options dialog box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES – PostScript Printing
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

47
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Click the Print button to print pages 2-5 as Spreads:

•

Open the Spreads.pdf file from the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples folder to see an
example.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

PostScript Printing - EXERCISES

 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

Printing Bleeds
•
•
•

Still in the Intermediate Exercises 7.p65 file, Go to page 1.
Press the Ctrl + P key combination to open the Print Document dialog box.
Enter the following settings into the Print Document dialog box:

Printer:
PPD:
Copies:
Range:
Reader’s spreads:
Orientation:
•
•

Any available Postscript Printer
Any available PPD for the Postscript Printer
1
1,6
Unchecked
Portrait

Click the Paper button.
Enter the following settings into the Print Paper dialog box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISES – PostScript Printing
PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate

49
 2001 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Click the Print button to print Pages 1 and 6:

•
•

Close publication.
Open the Bleeds.pdf file from the PageMaker 6.5 Intermediate Samples folder to see an
example.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2001 - www.cctglobal.com

Adobe PageMaker 6.5
Advanced Level
Training Manual
Corporate Edition

C C T G L O B A L

.C O M

© 1995-2002 Cheltenham Computer Training
Crescent House
24 Lansdown Crescent Lane
Cheltenham
Gloucestershire
GL50 2LD, UK
Tel: +44 (0)1242 227200
Fax: +44 (0)1242 253200
Email: info@cctglobal.com
Internet: http://www.cctglobal.com
All trademarks acknowledged. E&OE.
© Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 No part of this document may be copied without written permission from
Cheltenham Computer Training unless produced under the terms of a courseware site license agreement with
Cheltenham Computer Training.
All reasonable precautions have been taken in the preparation of this document, including both technical and nontechnical proofing. Cheltenham Computer Training and all staff assume no responsibility for any errors or omissions. No
warranties are made, expressed or implied with regard to these notes. Cheltenham Computer Training shall not be
responsible for any direct, incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of any material contained in this
document. If you find any errors in these training modules, please inform Cheltenham Computer Training. Whilst every
effort is made to eradicate typing or technical mistakes, we apologize for any errors you may detect. All courses are
updated on a regular basis, so your feedback is both valued by us and will help us to maintain the highest possible
standards.
Sample versions of courseware from Cheltenham Computer Training
(Normally supplied in Adobe Acrobat format)
If the version of courseware that you are viewing is marked as NOT FOR TRAINING, SAMPLE, or similar, then it cannot
be used as part of a training course, and is made available purely for content and style review. This is to give you the
opportunity to preview our courseware, prior to making a purchasing decision. Sample versions may not be re-sold to a
third party.
For current license information
Cheltenham Computer Training reserves the right to alter the licensing conditions at any time, without prior notice. No
terms or conditions will affect your rights as defined under UK law. Please see the site license agreement available at:
www.cctglobal.com/agreement

Courseware Release Version 5.0

WORKING ON BOOKS ............................................................................................................................. 1
BOOKS ........................................................................................................................................................ 2
Getting Started....................................................................................................................................... 2
Using the Book Publication Lists dialog box......................................................................................... 3
Creating a Book list ............................................................................................................................... 3
Removing a Book list ............................................................................................................................. 3
Auto Renumbering Pages....................................................................................................................... 4
CREATING A TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................................................. 5
Defining what goes into the Table of Contents ...................................................................................... 5
Using Styles to Mark paragraphs to be added to the Table of Contents................................................ 6
Create a Table of Contents Publication................................................................................................. 6
Generating a Table of Contents in a stand-alone publication ............................................................... 8
Copying a Book list................................................................................................................................ 8
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................... 9
LIBRARIES ................................................................................................................................................ 11
WORKING WITH THE LIBRARIES PALETTE ................................................................................................. 12
Displaying the Libraries palette .......................................................................................................... 12
Using the Library Palette menu........................................................................................................... 13
Using the Library Palette menu Display commands............................................................................ 13
Using the Library palette..................................................................................................................... 14
Opening an Existing Library ............................................................................................................... 15
Deleting an Existing Library ............................................................................................................... 15
Adding Library objects ........................................................................................................................ 15
Removing Library objects.................................................................................................................... 16
Placing Library objects ....................................................................................................................... 16
SEARCHING THE LIBRARY ......................................................................................................................... 17
Cataloging and Searching for Library objects .................................................................................... 17
Editing the Library .............................................................................................................................. 18
Searching the Library .......................................................................................................................... 18
Displaying all the items in the Library palette .................................................................................... 19
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 20
ADVANCED PLUG-INS ........................................................................................................................... 21
ADDING HEADERS AND FOOTERS ............................................................................................................. 22
Using Headers and Footers................................................................................................................. 22
Using the Running Headers and Footer dialog box ............................................................................ 23
Positioning Headers Footers ............................................................................................................... 23
Using the Preview dialog box.............................................................................................................. 24
Previewing Headers and footers.......................................................................................................... 25
USING THE WORD COUNTER..................................................................................................................... 26
Using the Word Counter ...................................................................................................................... 26
USING THE PUBLICATION CONVERTER ..................................................................................................... 27
Converting Publications ...................................................................................................................... 27
USING EPS FONT SCANNER ...................................................................................................................... 29
Scanning for Fonts in EPS files ........................................................................................................... 29
USING THE CHANGE CASE PLUG-IN .......................................................................................................... 30
Changing Cases ................................................................................................................................... 30
BALANCING COLUMNS ............................................................................................................................. 31
Balancing Columns.............................................................................................................................. 31
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 32
TABLES ...................................................................................................................................................... 33
WORKING WITH TABLES ........................................................................................................................... 34
FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Using Tables ........................................................................................................................................ 34
Creating New Tables ........................................................................................................................... 34
Setting up Table ................................................................................................................................... 35
Choosing the More button ................................................................................................................... 35
Using the Border Weight options......................................................................................................... 36
Setting Colors for the Borders ............................................................................................................. 37
Opening Existing Tables...................................................................................................................... 37
Switching Between Tables ................................................................................................................... 37
Saving a Table ..................................................................................................................................... 37
Using OLE Tables................................................................................................................................ 38
Creating OLE Tables ........................................................................................................................... 38
Creating an OLE Embedded Table...................................................................................................... 38
EDITING TABLES ....................................................................................................................................... 39
Editing and Formatting Tables............................................................................................................ 39
Modifying Text in a Range of Cells...................................................................................................... 40
Selecting Text and Cells....................................................................................................................... 40
Quickly selecting text in your table...................................................................................................... 40
Using the Text Attribute Palette........................................................................................................... 40
Using Vertical Decimal Alignment ...................................................................................................... 41
Resizing rows and columns.................................................................................................................. 41
Specifying a row and column size........................................................................................................ 41
Changing the Size of the Table ............................................................................................................ 42
Adding and Deleting Rows and Columns ............................................................................................ 42
Grouping Cells..................................................................................................................................... 43
Using the Table Attributes Palette....................................................................................................... 43
Using Adobe Table’s Color Dialog boxes ........................................................................................... 44
EXPORTING TABLES .................................................................................................................................. 45
Exporting Tables.................................................................................................................................. 45
Exporting Tables as Text ..................................................................................................................... 45
Exporting a Table as a Graphic........................................................................................................... 46
IMPORTING TABLES .................................................................................................................................. 47
Importing Table Data .......................................................................................................................... 47
Importing a Table with the Place Command ....................................................................................... 48
Using Excel and Word Tables ............................................................................................................. 48
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 49
ADVANCED TYPE.................................................................................................................................... 51
HORIZONTAL SPACING.............................................................................................................................. 52
Using Kerning...................................................................................................................................... 52
Using Tracking .................................................................................................................................... 53
VERTICAL SPACING .................................................................................................................................. 54
Using Leading...................................................................................................................................... 54
Using the Baseline Shift....................................................................................................................... 55
HYPHENATIONS ........................................................................................................................................ 56
Using Hyphenations............................................................................................................................. 56
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 57
ADVANCED COLOR................................................................................................................................ 59
WHAT IS CMS? ........................................................................................................................................ 60
Using CMS........................................................................................................................................... 60
Working with CMS............................................................................................................................... 61
Turning Off CMS ................................................................................................................................. 61
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 62
SCRIPTS ..................................................................................................................................................... 63
WORKING WITH SCRIPTS .......................................................................................................................... 64
FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Displaying the Scripts palette .............................................................................................................. 64
Using the Scripts palette menu ............................................................................................................ 65
Creating Scripts ................................................................................................................................... 65
Adding Scripts...................................................................................................................................... 66
Removing and Restoring Scripts.......................................................................................................... 66
Running Scripts.................................................................................................................................... 66
EDITING SCRIPTS ...................................................................................................................................... 67
Editing Scripts ..................................................................................................................................... 67
Tracing Scripts..................................................................................................................................... 68
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 69
PREPRESS FUNDAMENTALS ............................................................................................................... 71
TROUBLE-SHOOTING ................................................................................................................................ 72
Trouble-Shooting the Publication........................................................................................................ 72
Checking your Images ......................................................................................................................... 72
Checking your Fonts............................................................................................................................ 73
Checking Images and Colors............................................................................................................... 73
Updating Links..................................................................................................................................... 74
TRAPPING ................................................................................................................................................. 75
Using Trapping Terms ......................................................................................................................... 75
USING SAVE FOR SERVICE PROVIDER ....................................................................................................... 76
Using the Save for Service Provider Plug-in ....................................................................................... 76
Generating Reports.............................................................................................................................. 79
Saving files for Service Provider ......................................................................................................... 79
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 81
PAPERLESS PRINTING .......................................................................................................................... 83
PRINTING WITHOUT PAPER ....................................................................................................................... 84
Printing to an EPS ............................................................................................................................... 84
Printing to a File ................................................................................................................................. 85
CREATING PDF FILES ............................................................................................................................... 87
Exporting PDF files............................................................................................................................. 87
Converting PageMaker document to a PDF........................................................................................ 88
Setting Paper Sizes .............................................................................................................................. 88
Saving and Reusing settings ................................................................................................................ 89
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 90
WEB PUBLISHING................................................................................................................................... 91
EXPORTING HTML ................................................................................................................................... 92
Preparing to Export to HTML ............................................................................................................. 92
Converting publications to HTML ....................................................................................................... 94
REVIEW QUESTIONS.................................................................................................................................. 96

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Working on Books
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

1
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Working on Books
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Get started
Use the Book Publication Lists dialog box
Create a Book list
Remove a Book list
Auto renumber pages
Create an Index
Add an Index entry
Cross-reference an entry
Define what goes into the Table of Contents
Use Styles to Mark paragraphs to be added to the Table of Contents
Create a Table of Contents Publication
Generate a Table of Contents in a stand-alone publication
Copy a Book list

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

2
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Working on Books
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Books

Books
•

•

PageMaker is a great
application for creating
long publications.
With Tools like the Book
Publication List, Indexing
and a Table of Contents,
you will be able to better
organize your long
Publications.

Getting
Started

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 2

PageMaker is a great application for creating long publications. With
Tools like the Book Publication List, Indexing and a Table of
Contents, you will be able to better organize long Publications.
Note: When you are trying to organize long publications it is best to
split them into chapters, setting up each chapter as a separate
PageMaker publication.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Working on Books
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Using the
Book
Publication
Lists dialog
box

•

Creating a
Book list

•
•
•

•

3
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

The Books Publication List manages the publications that form to
create the book.
From the main menu, choose Utilities > Book to open the Book
Publication List dialog box:

Open the publication in which you would like to create the Book List.
From the main menu, choose Utilities > Book.
In the Files/Directories window, locate the publication you want to
insert.
Select the publication and click the Insert button
OR double-click the name of the publication to insert it into the Book
list Window.

•

Use the Move up and Move down buttons to arrange the order of the
books lists and press the OK button.
Note: If you will be adding a Table of Contents to your book, it's best
to create a separate Table of Contents publication to build your Book
list.

Removing a
Book list

•
•
•

From the main menu, choose Utilities > Book.
Select the publication you would like to remove from the Book list
window.
Click the Remove button then click the OK button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

4
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Auto
Renumbering
Pages

Working on Books
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

To Auto renumber the pages in the Book list:
• Open the Publication containing the Book list.
• From the main menu, choose Utilities > Book.
• Choose one of the Auto Page numbering options:

None – This option will disable the Auto Page numbering option.
Next Page – This option will number the pages so that the next book
in the list will continue the numbering from where the previous book
leaves off.
Example: If the previous book ends at page 10, the next book will
continue from page 11.
Next Odd Page – This option will number the pages so that the next
page in the list will begin numbering from the next available odd
number. So, if the previous book ends at page 11, the next book will
continue from page 13. Use this option if you want all the books to
start on the right-hand side. PageMaker will insert a page with the
Document Master attributes applied to it to make up for the missing
page.
Next Even Page – This option will number the pages so that the next
page in the list will begin numbering from the next available even
number. So if the previous book ends at page 10, the next book will
continue from page 12. Use this option when you want all the pages
to start on the left-hand side. PageMaker will insert a page with the
Document Master attributes applied to it to make up for the missing
page.
•

Click the OK button and confirm your choice. Then click the Yes
button on the Auto renumber prompt:

Note: You must have Page number markers already placed in your
publication in order for the auto renumbering to work.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Working on Books
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

5
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Creating a Table of Contents

Creating a Table of Contents
•

Once you decide what will
go into your Table of
Contents, you will need to
mark the paragraph for
inclusion into the table.

Defining what
goes into the
Table of
Contents

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 3

Once you decide what will go into your Table of Contents, you will
need to mark the paragraph for inclusion into the Table.

To include specific text into your Table of Contents:
• With the Text tool selected, place the cursor into the desired
paragraph.
• Press the Ctrl + M key combination
OR from the main menu, choose Type > Paragraph to display the
Paragraph Specifications dialog box.
•

Check the Include in Table of Contents checkbox and click the OK
button:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

6
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using Styles
to Mark
paragraphs to
be added to
the Table of
Contents

•

Working on Books
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

To speed up the Marking process you will need to create a Style so
that you can quickly and easily add items to your Table of Contents.

To Define a Style with the Table of Contents option:
• Press the Ctrl + B key combination
OR from the main menu, choose Window > Show Style to display the
Styles Palette.
•
•
•

Click the New Style button to display the Style Options, and name
your style.
Click the Paragraph button, and check the Include in Table of
Contents checkbox.
Click the OK button twice to return to the publication window with the
new style added:

Note: If you base a style on another style, make sure you uncheck the
Include in Table of Contents checkbox, unless this option is desired
for the specified style.
Create a
Table of
Contents
Publication

•

When creating a book, it is best to create a separate publication for the
Table of Contents. If possible, use the Table of Contents
publication to build your Book list.

To generate the Table of Contents in a publication that contains the
Book list:
• Open the Publication containing the Book list.
• Make sure the Book lists are complete and up-to-date.
• From the Main menu, choose Utilities > Create TOC to display the
Create Table of Contents dialog box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Working on Books
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

7
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Enter a Title of up to 30 characters into the Title field or use the
default Contents title, and then check any of the following options:

•

Replace existing Table of Contents – Checking this box will
automatically update an existing Table of Contents.
Note: This option is unavailable when you first create a Table of
Contents, so you have to place the Table yourself.

•

Include Book publication – Checking this box will check the Table of
Contents for all the publications listed in the Book list.
Note: Uncheck this box if you only want to create a Table of Contents
for the current publication.

•

Include paragraphs on hidden layers – Checking this box will
include paragraphs on hidden layers in your Table of Contents.
Note: It is best to leave this box unchecked unless you have a specific
reason to add the hidden paragraphs into your Table of Contents.

•

Select one of the Format options:
No Page Number – This option sets the Table of Contents with any
numbers.
Page number before entry – This option causes the numbers to
appear before the marked entry.
Page number after entry – This option causes the numbers to appear
at the end of the marked entry.

•

In the Between entry and page number field, enter up to seven
character of what you would like to add between the entry and the
page number
OR use the PageMaker default ^t, which will give you a Tab.

•

Click the OK button to return to the publication and use the new
Loaded Text icon to place the Table of Contents
OR if you have checked the Replacing existing Table of Contents
checkbox, the existing table will be updated for you.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

8
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Generating a
Table of
Contents in a
stand-alone
publication

•

Working on Books
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

You can also generate a Table of Contents for publications that now
contain Book lists.

To Generate the Table of Contents for a stand-alone publication:
• Open the publication to which you would like to add the Table of
Contents.
• Make sure you have marked all the text you want to be added to your
Table of Contents.
• From the main menu, choose Utilities > Create TOC.
• Enter a Title into the Title field
OR use the default Contents title, and then check any of the
checkboxes that apply.

Copying a
Book list

•

Select the desired Format option and click the OK button.

•

If the Publication you are generating the Table of Contents in does
not contain a Book list, you will have to copy the book list.

To Copy the Book list:
• Open the publication containing the Book list, and make sure the
Table of Contents publication is added into the Book list.
• From the main menu choose Utilities > Book while pressing the Ctrl
key.
Note: Every publication will now have a copy of the Book lists. If you
make changes to any of the Book lists, you will have to repeat this
step to update the Book lists.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Working on Books
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

9
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 4

Get Started?
Use the Book Publication Lists dialog box?
Create a Book list?
Remove a Book list?
Auto renumber pages?
Create an Index?
Add an Index entry?
Cross-reference an entry?
Define what goes into the Table of Contents?
Use Styles to Mark paragraphs to be added to the Table of Contents?
Create a Table of Contents Publication?
Generate a Table of Contents in a stand-alone publication?
Copy a Book list?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Libraries
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

11
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Libraries
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Display the Libraries palette
Use the Libraries palette
Create a New Library
Delete an Existing Library
Add and Remove Library objects
Place Library objects
Catalog and Search for Library objects

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

12
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Libraries
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Working with the Libraries Palette

Working with the Libraries Palette
•

The Libraries palette
allows you to store and
have easy access to an
infinite number of
graphics, phrases and
bullets.

Displaying
the Libraries
palette

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 5

The Libraries palette allows you to store and have easy access to an
infinite number of graphics, phrases and bullets. Anything that can
be copied using the pointer tool can be added to the Library.
From the main menu, choose Windows > Plug-in Palettes > Show
Library:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Libraries
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Using the
Library
Palette menu

•

13
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

The Library palette menu contains all the tools you need to manage
the Library palette:

The Library palette menu commands are:
• New Library - this command is used to create new libraries.
• Open Library - this command is used to open existing libraries.
• Close Library - this command is used to close the current library.
• Search Library - this command is used to search for a specific item in
the library.
• Remove Item - this command is used to delete items from the library.
• Show All Items - this command is used to display the full list of items
after you have used the search command to locate specific items.
• Edit Item After Adding - this command is used to edit the items as
soon as you place them into the library.
Using the
Library
Palette menu
Display
commands

•

Display Images - this command is used to only display the thumbnail
of the items in the library:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

14
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the
Library
palette

Libraries
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•

Display Names - this command is used to only display the names of
the item in the library:

•

Display Both - this command is used to display both the name and
thumbnail of the items in the library:

•
•

Libraries are useful when they are used regularly.
They can be created ahead of time and stored on the server.

To create a New Library:
• From the main menu, choose Windows > Plug-in Palettes > Show
Library.
• From the palette menu, select the New Library command:

•

Decide where you would like to store the library and enter a name for
the new library into the File Name field then press the OK button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Libraries
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Opening an
Existing
Library

•

15
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

From the main menu, choose Windows > Plug-in Palettes > Show
Library.
From the palette menu, select the Open Library command:

•

Find the location of the desired Library and click the Open button.

Deleting an
Existing
Library

•
•

Locate the file through the Windows Explorer window.
Select the file and from the main menu, choose File > Delete.

Adding
Library
objects

•

From the main menu, choose Windows> Plug-in Palettes > Show
Library.
From the palette menu, select the Open Library command

•

OR select the New Library command to create a library.
•
•

With the Pointer tool, select the object or objects from your publication
that you would like to add.
Click the plus (+) icon at the bottom-right of the Library palette to add
the item.
Note: If you have the Edit item after adding command checked,
enter the information into the Item Information dialog box and press
the OK button:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

16
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Removing
Library
objects

•

Libraries
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

From the main menu, choose Windows > Plug-in Palettes> Show
Library.
Note: If the library is not open, select the Open Library command
from the palette menu and open the library.

Placing
Library
objects

•
•

Select the item from the Library palette that you would like to remove.
From the Library palette menu and choose the Remove Item
command:

•

Click the OK button when the error prompt appears:

To place a Library object on the page:
• From the main menu, choose Windows > Plug-in Palettes > Show
Library.
• From the palette menu, select the Open Library command.
• Click and drag the item from the Library onto the publication page.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Libraries
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

17
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Searching the Library

Searching the Library
•

•

You can attach information
to the objects so that you
can locate it much easier.
You can enter titles, enter
the name of the person
who created the object in
the library, enter the date
the object was created, or
enter a short description of
the object.

Cataloging
and
Searching for
Library
objects

•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 6

You can attach information to the objects so that you can locate it
much more easily.
You can enter titles, enter the name of the person who created the
object in the library, enter the date the object was created, or enter a
short description of the object.
By cataloging the items, objects can be located by author, title or
keywords.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

18
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Libraries
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

From the Library palette menu, check the Edit Item after Adding
command to allow the Item Information dialog box to appear each
time an item is added to the library:

Editing the
Library

To edit the Library items:
• From the main menu, choose Windows > Plug-in Palettes > Show
Library.
• From the palette menu, select the Open Library command.
• Double click on an item in the Library palette so the Item Information
dialog box appears.
• Update the information fields and press the OK button.

Searching the
Library

To search for Library objects:
• From the main menu, choose Windows > Plug-in Palettes > Show
Library.
• From the palette menu, select the Search Library command to
display the Search Library dialog box.
• Enter the desired criteria of your search fields to search for the item by
Keyword, Author or Title.
Note: In the keyword section, there will be a drop-down menu asking
for the criteria of your search. From there you can choose to search
by Keyword Only:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Libraries
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•

19
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

When you have finished entering your search criteria, press the
Search button.
Note: The Library palette will now only display the items that meet the
conditions.

Displaying all
the items in
the Library
palette

•

If the criteria has not been met, there will be a message No items
match the search will be displayed:

•

From the main menu, choose Windows > Plug-in Palettes > Show
Library.
From the Library palette menu, chose the Show All Items command.

•

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

20
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Libraries
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Review Questions

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Advanced Plug-Ins
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

21
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Advanced Plug-Ins
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Use Headers and Footers
Use the Running Headers and Footer dialog box
Position Headers Footers
Use the Preview dialog box
Preview Headers and footers
Use the Word Counter
Convert Publications
Scan for Fonts in EPS files
Change Cases
Balance Columns

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

22
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Advanced Plug-Ins
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Adding Headers and Footers

Adding Headers and Footers
•

When creating a book or a
large publication, it's best
to add in headers and
footers to help breakup the
pages and chapters so
that readers can find what
they need quickly and
easily.

Using
Headers and
Footers

•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 8

When creating a book or a large publication, it's best to add
Headers and Footers to break up the pages and chapters so readers
can find what they need quickly and easily.
The Headers and Footers can provide the necessary page and
chapter information.
From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Running
Headers & Footers:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Advanced Plug-Ins
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•
•
Using the
Running
Headers and
Footer dialog
box

Positioning
Headers
Footers

23
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

The Running Headers and Footers plug-in only works on one story
and on one publication at a time.
You can define the size and position or style of the Headers &
Footers so they are consistent throughout the publication.

•

Publication and Master Page drop-down list and Sample Window:

•

Nudge buttons, Positioning fields and Text block width fields:

To position and format the header’s or footer's text block:
• With the Pointer tool selected, choose the text block that will be
used for the header and footer.
• From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Running
Headers/Footers to reveal the Running Headers & Footers dialog
box.
• Use the Master Page drop-down list to select Master page or
Publication pages guides to apply the header and footer.
• Click, drag, and place the Place Holder icon onto the sample page to
add a text block to the sample page in dialog box.
Note: Click and drag the Place holder off the page to remove it.
•
•
•

Use the Nudge buttons or the Position and Width tool to make
adjustments to your placeholder.
Select a Paragraph Style from the Content Style drop-down list to be
applied to your header and footer.
Select the desired options in the Apply To section and choose a page
range to apply the headers and footers to.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

24
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the
Preview
dialog box

Advanced Plug-Ins
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•

You can quickly preview publications with the Running Headers &
Footers you have defined without closing the dialog box:

•

The Preview Window:

•

Preview Page icon:

•

Preview Next Header/Footer button:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Advanced Plug-Ins
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Previewing
Headers and
footers

25
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Preview Magnification and nudge buttons:

•

Preview Magnification Amount:

To preview headers and footers:
• From the Running Headers and Footers dialog box, click the
Preview button to display the Preview dialog box.
Note: The preview will display the pages entered into the Apply To
section of the Running Headers and footers dialog box.
To center the header or footer text block:
• Click the View Next button.
• Repeat for each header or footer you want to preview.
To change pages:
• Click a Page tab at the bottom of the preview window.
To change the page view:
• Click the Magnify icon and choose the preset size
OR click the up or down arrow to go to the next lower or higher view.
To scroll through the preview:
• Move the cursor within the preview window and drag the hand icon.
• Click the OK button to return to the Running Header/Footer dialog
box.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

26
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Advanced Plug-Ins
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Using the Word Counter

Using the Word Counter
•

The Word Counter scans
your entire publication and
gives you a read out of the
number of Characters,
Words, Sentences,
Paragraphs.

Using the
Word Counter

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 9

The Word Counter scans your entire publication and gives you a read
out of the number of Characters, Words, Sentences, Paragraphs,
Text Blocks and Stories being used in the Publication:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Advanced Plug-Ins
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

27
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the Publication Converter

Using the Publication Converter
•

The Publication converter
allows you to open
PageMaker 4.0 - 6.01
publications files and
convert them to
PageMaker 6.5 files.

Converting
Publications

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 10

The Publication converter allows you to open PageMaker 4.0 – 6.01
publication files and convert them to PageMaker 6.5 files.
Note: You must close all of your opened PageMaker publications
before you can use the Converter, If you try to use the converter when
you have other publications opened, you will receive a prompt
instructing you to close down all of your publications files:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

28
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Advanced Plug-Ins
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Publication
Converter. You have the option of replacing the earlier files with the
converted versions in order to save disk space:

To open PageMaker 4.0 – 6.01 publications with the Publication
Converter plug-in:
• Close all open publications.
• From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Publication
Converter.
The conversion options are as follows:
• Replace Publications - this option is used only if you want to
overwrite the file you are converting.
Note: It is recommended that you leave this option deselected, so that
you have the original file available as a backup.
•
•

Change Publication Extension To - this option is used if you want to
change the file names of converted publications and then enter the
extension you want to add to the filename.
Run Script - this option is used if you want to process the converted
publications with a PageMaker script.
Note: Select the script by clicking the Browse button and doubleclicking the script file stored on your drive.

•
•

Click the Search button to specify the kind of files you want to open,
and the way in which they are stored, and then click Search.
Click the Run button to convert each file listed in the Publication
Converter dialog box.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Advanced Plug-Ins
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

29
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using EPS Font Scanner

Using EPS Font Scanner
•

When you print on a
PostScript printer, you can
have PageMaker search
EPS graphics and Adobe
Illustrator files for fonts.

Scanning for
Fonts in EPS
files

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 11

When you print on a PostScript printer, you can have PageMaker
search EPS graphics and Adobe Illustrator files for fonts.
If a PostScript graphic contains fonts that can not be found on the
computer, a dialog box will appear indicating the missing font, the
graphic's file name, and the page where you'll find the graphic:

To scan PostScript graphics for fonts:
• From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > EPS Font
Scanner.
• Click the On radio button and click OK.
• From the main menu, choose File > Print, set printing options, and
click Print.
Note: A warning dialog box appears if fonts are missing.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

30
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Advanced Plug-Ins
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Using the Change Case Plug-In

Using The Change Case Plug-In
•

The Change Case plug-in
allows you to change the
case to either lower case,
Upper Case, Title Case,
Sentence case and Toggle
Case.

Changing
Cases

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 12

The Change Case plug-in allows you to change the case to either
lower case, Upper Case, Title Case, Sentence case and Toggle
Case.

To change capitalization of a selected range of text:
• From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Change Case.
Your options include capitalizing the first letter of each word
OR the first letter of each sentence in the selection:

Note: The Change Case will not work on text that uses the Control
palette or Character Specifications dialog box with the change
case feature applied to it.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Advanced Plug-Ins
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

31
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Balancing Columns

Balancing Columns
•

The Balance Columns
plug-in allows you to
select 2 to 40 columns and
balance them.

Balancing
Columns

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 13

•

The Balance Columns plug-in allows you to select 2 to 40 columns
and balance them:

•

You can balance the Top or Bottom of the column and decide to have
the leftover lines move to the Right or Left side of the column.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

32
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Advanced Plug-Ins
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 14

Use Headers and Footers?
Use the Running Headers and Footer dialog box?
Position Headers Footers?
Use the Preview dialog box?
Preview Headers and footers?
Use the Word Counter?
Convert Publications?
Scan for Fonts in EPS files?
Change Cases?
Balance Columns?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

33
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Tables
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Use Tables
Create New Tables
Open Existing Tables
Save a Table
Create OLE Tables
Use OLE Tables
Edit and Format Tables
Import Tables
Export Tables
Use Excel and Word Tables

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

34
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Working with Tables

Working with Tables
•

•

There is a separate
application in PageMaker
called Adobe Table, and
from there you can import
it into PageMaker.
This function is a lot
simpler and quicker way to
format tables.

Using Tables

•
•

Creating New
Tables

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 15

There is a separate application in PageMaker called Adobe Table,
and from there you can import tables into PageMaker. This function
of formatting text and information is simple and quick.
Adobe Table can be found in the Extras folder within the PageMaker
application folder.
Once Adobe Table has been launched, a New Table dialog box will
appear. In this dialog box you have the opportunity to choose how you
want your table to appear:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Setting up
Table

Choosing the
More button

35
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

The number of rows and columns can be set up to a maximum of
100 each. The height and width of the table can be set up to 40
inches by 40 inches:

•

The space between the text in the adjacent rows and columns
(known as the "gutter") can be formatted as well:

•

You can change any of the formatting by simply choosing Format >
Format Cells from the main menu to bring up the Format Cells dialog
box again.

•

By clicking the More button, the New Table dialog box will expand so
you can specify the weight and color of the borders of the table:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

36
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using the
Border
Weight
options

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

The following are the border weight options you can choose from:
• Outside determines the weight of the borders on the perimeter of the
table.
• Internal determines the weight of the borders within the table.
• All sets with weight of the borders inside and out all at once.
• Weight can be set by selecting a preset in the Weight pop-up menu or
by entering a value from 0 to 36 points:

•
•
•

If you would like no borders, just select None.
Remember, that the line weight cannot be bigger than the gutter.
If you would like no borders, choose None from the weight drop down
list.
Note: Remember that the line weight cannot be bigger than the
gutter.

•

Click the Less button to hide the extra options:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

37
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Setting
Colors for the
Borders

•
•

You have to choose a color from the pop-up menu. Choosing None
resets all the border weights to 0pt.
Setting the fill would apply color to the background of all cells in the
new table. A fill color can be applied at any percentage by using the
Tint Option between 0 and 100%:

Opening
Existing
Tables

•

From the main menu, choose File > Open

Switching
Between
Tables

OR press the Ctrl + O key combination.
•
•

Select the table you would like to open.
Click the OK button.

•

You can have as many tables as you want open at once as long as
you have enough RAM.

To switch between tables:
• Choose Window from the main menu.
• Select the title of the table to be viewed.
Saving a
Table

To save a file:
• From the main menu, choose File > Save
OR press the Ctrl + S key combination to open the Save as dialog
box.
•
•
•

Specify whether you would like to save it as a table or template.
Choose a folder destination and enter a name into the File name
field.
Click the Save button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

38
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using OLE
Tables

•

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

If you are creating a simple table
OR if you do not have enough RAM to run PageMaker and Adobe
Table simultaneously
OR if your table is more then one page, you can still create the table
in PageMaker; you can create an OLE Table.

•

Creating OLE
Tables

To create an OLE Table in PageMaker:
• Go to the page where you would like the table to be inserted.
• From the main menu, choose Edit > Insert Object to display the
Insert Pages dialog box:

•
•
•
Creating an
OLE
Embedded
Table

The advantage to creating OLE Tables (Object Linking and
Embedding) in PageMaker is that you will have an easier time
formatting the table, with styles, scripts and tagged text.

•

Check the Create New radio button then select Adobe Table 3.0 from
the Object List and click the OK button to launch the application.
Setup the table and enter the desired content.
When the table is finished, choose File > Exit and Return To from the
Adobe Table 3.0 main menu to return to the PageMaker Publication.
When you make your table an inline graphic, you can insert it at any
specific location in the text.

To create an OLE embedded:
• In Adobe Table 3.0 select a completed table with the Selection
button which is located in the upper left corner of the table.
• From the main menu, choose Edit > Copy to copy the table to the
Clipboard.
• Switch back to PageMaker and place the text cursor where the table
should be pasted.
• From the main menu, choose Edit > Paste Special and paste the
table as an Adobe Table 3.0 object.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

39
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Editing Tables

Editing Tables
•

When Editing and
Formatting Tables, you
must click into a cell
before you can type, edit
or format text.

Editing and
Formatting
Tables

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 16

When Editing and Formatting Tables you must click into a cell
before you can type, edit or format any text:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

40
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Modifying
Text in a
Range of
Cells

•

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Select the cells by dragging the text cursor across them.
Note: If you would like to select an entire column, you can do so by
clicking on the gray bar at the top of each column and dragging across
the area you would like selected.
OR if you would like to select an entire row you can also do so by
clicking on the gray bar at the beginning of the rows and dragging
across.

•

From the main menu choose Window > Show Text Palette to go to
the Text Attribute palette:

Note: When you are typing, the text will automatically wrap to fit
within the width of the column. The height of the row will expand to
contain the text.
•

Use the cut or copy commands to take text from one cell and paste it
into another cell in the same table or another open table.
Note: Borders cannot be copied and pasted from a range of cells
unless you cut or copy the whole table.

Selecting
Text and
Cells

•

The fastest way to select a cell is either to double-click to select a
word
OR triple-click to select a paragraph.

Quickly
selecting text
in your table

•

You can also select cells by dragging your cursor through them.

•

Clicking the small Selection button in the upper left corner of the table
selects the entire table.
Clicking a Row Selection button selects an entire row.
Dragging up or down through the Row Selection buttons selects
multiple rows.
Clicking a Column Selection bottom selects an entire column
Dragging left or right through the Column Selection button will allow
you to select multiple columns.
Holding Ctrl while you click the Selection buttons will allow you to
select noncontiguous rows or cells.

•
•
•
•
•

Using the
Text Attribute
Palette

•
•

The Text Attributes palette allows you to format text in Adobe Table.
Adobe Table offers fewer numbers, or characters and paragraph level
text attributes compared to PageMaker.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Using Vertical
Decimal
Alignment

41
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

There are two formatting attributes that are unique to Adobe Table
3.0: Vertical Alignment and Decimal Alignment:

•

The Vertical Alignment determines whether the text is aligned to the
top, center or bottom of the cell.

•

The Decimal Alignment is used to align numbers.

To use the decimal Alignment:
• Selected the paragraph that contains the numbers you want to align.
• From the main menu, choose Window > Show Text Palette and click
the Decimal Alignment button.
• Insert a tab immediately before each number you want to align by
decimal point.
• Make sure the View > Show Tab Markers and View > Show
Selection button commands are selected in order to override the
default position of the tab stop.
• Drag the tab marker in the Selection button to where you want the
decimals to appear.
Resizing
rows and
columns

•

Specifying a
row and
column size

•

•
•
•

By dragging the line that separates the row or column, you can resize
your columns or rows accordingly.
Holding Shift as you drag constrains the height and width of the table.
Therefore, the overall height or width of the table will not change.
You can specify an exact size by selecting Cell > Row/Column size.
Here you will enter a number for Row Height and Column width.
You can also use the Table Attributes palette and enter the exact
size for the width at top and height right below it.
In the drop-down menus, you can choose which integers you would
like to use. This does not change the adjacent rows or columns.
By nudging the rows or columns with the arrows you can resize your
selection in small increments of 0.01 inch.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

42
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Changing the
Size of the
Table

•

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

From the main menu, choose Format > Format cells
OR press the Ctrl + F key combinations to display the Format Cells
dialog box:

•

Type in the new height or width you want.
Note: A screen will notify you that you might get unexpected results.

•
•

You can choose Yes to by-pass this notification, and then click Apply
to preview the changes.
Click the OK button to return to the table.
Note: Rows and columns are resized evenly to adjust to the new
height and width.

Adding and
Deleting
Rows and
Columns

•
•

There are a couple of ways of adding and deleting rows and
columns in a table.
Press Tab to create a new row while with the insertion point in the
table's last cell
OR change the number of rows and columns in the Layout section of
the Format Cells dialog box
OR select Cell > Delete to remove the selected row or column and its
content from the table.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Grouping
Cells

43
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

To group cells:
• Selecting the cells you would like to group.
• From the main menu, choose Cell > Group.
Note: you can merge selected cells into one cell.
To ungroup cells:
• Select the grouped cell.
• From the main menu, choose Cell > Ungroup.

Using the
Table
Attributes
Palette

•
•

Use the Table Attribute palette to make creating and editing tables
easier.
From the main menu, choose Window > Show Table Palette
OR press the Ctrl + 8 key combination to display the Table Attributes
palette:

•
•
•

Through the Table Attribute Palette you can edit the Borderline
weight by simply adding a value in points. Create a Border Proxy
that fits your table.
Select the color you would like your Border by choosing Border
Selection. Choosing Cell Fill fills the cells with any color from the
palette.
Row size and Column size are changed by entering a value. Finally,
the Horizontal gutter and Vertical gutter can be changed also by
adding a numeric value.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

44
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Using Adobe
Table’s Color
Dialog boxes

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•

Choose Format > Define Colors and use the Table Color Dialog
boxes to apply color to text, fill background. You can change or add
color to the table borders, or create additional colors:

•

When using a spot color, it must be added to the color palette in
PageMaker before printing. If this is not done properly you will not be
able to print the color separations.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

45
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Exporting Tables

Exporting Tables
•

You can export Adobe
Table files by choosing
File > Export.
You must export your table
as a graphic. Otherwise,
you will risk losing your
formatting that has been
applied in the Adobe
Table.

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 17

Exporting
Tables

•

You can export Adobe Table files by choosing File > Export. You
must export your table as a graphic. Otherwise, you will risk losing
your formatting that has been applied in the Adobe Table.

Exporting
Tables as
Text

•

From the main menu, choose File > Export > Text:

•

Enter a name for the exported file into the File Name field.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

46
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

From the Save as type drop-down list, select on of the following:
Tab-delimited - this option will separate the exported data with tabs.
OR Comma-delimited - this option will separate the exported data
with commas.

Exporting a
Table as a
Graphic

•

Click the Export button.

•

From the main menu, choose File > Export > Graphic:

•
•

Enter a name for the exported file into the File Name field.
From the Save as type drop-down list, select one of the following:
EMF - this option will export the table as an Enhanced Metafile.
EPS (Include Fonts) - this option will export the table as an
Encapsulated PostScript file and embed the font.
EPS (Don't Include Fonts) - this option will export the table as an
Encapsulated PostScript file without embedding the file.
Note: If you include fonts the file size will be enlarged, but you will
not have problems finding the fonts.

•

Click the Export button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

47
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Importing Tables

Import Tables
•

•

When importing data from
an existing file, you must
import the file in text only
format.
The data cannot be
imported as graphics.

Importing
Table Data

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 18

When importing data from an existing file, you must import the file in
text only format. The data cannot be imported as graphics.

To create a new table:
• Enter the number of rows and columns you need. Make sure that
there is one extra row than what you originally have in your file. If not,
this will throw the chart off.
• Put your cursor at the beginning of the first cell of the table.
• Select File > Import Text and the Import dialog box will appear:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

48
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•
•

Now you must choose the file you would like to import.
Do not forget to choose the delimiter that separates cells in the text or
your text will come in all mixed-up.

Importing a
Table with the
Place
Command

•
•
•

After exporting the EPS file you now have to import it into PageMaker.
Select the Place command.
The graphic will be linked to PageMaker and not the Adobe Table
file.

Using Excel
and Word
Tables

•

Word and Excel tables can be imported into PageMaker in tables.
But you will not get the formatting that it had in its original file.
Therefore you will lose all row and column formatting.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

49
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 19

Use Tables?
Create New Tables?
Open Existing Tables?
Save a Table?
Create OLE Tables?
Use OLE Tables?
Edit and Format Tables?
Import Tables?
Export Tables?
Use Excel and Word Tables?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Advanced Type
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

51
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Advanced Type
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•

Use Kerning
Use Tracking
Use Leading
Use the Baseline Shift
Use Hyphenations

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

52
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Advanced Type
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Horizontal Spacing

Horizontal Spacing
•

The Kern option allows
you to adjust the space
between characters,
allowing you to create an
equal amount of space
between each word or
lines of text.

Using
Kerning

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 20

The Kern option enables you to adjust the space between characters
so you can fine-tune and even out the amount of space between each
word or line of text.

To use the Kerning option:
• Select the text that you would like to adjust the spacing in:

•

Open the Control Panel to adjust the Kerning:

•

You can use the forward or back arrows to increase the space
between letters
OR decrease the space between letters:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Advanced Type
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Using
Tracking

•

53
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Tracking adjusts the density of the type on the page.

To use the Tracking option:
• Select the body of text that you would like to track:

•

Go to the Control Panel and select the Track drop-down menu to
choose the body text format that you would like to apply:

•

After applying the format, the selection will automatically adjust the
body of text:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

54
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Advanced Type
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Vertical Spacing

Vertical Spacing
•

The Leading option allows
you to adjust space
between lines of text
allowing you to create an
equal amount of space
between each line.

Using
Leading

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 21

The Leading option allows you to adjust the space between lines of
text so you can create an equal amount of space between each line.

To use the Leading option:
• Select the body of text that you need to adjust:

•

With the arrows on the Control panel nudge the text to the desired
line spacing
OR define exactly what amounts of space you would like to use by
inputting the amounts:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Advanced Type
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Using the
Baseline Shift

55
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

You can also select the auto leading to have it automatically adjust
the space within each line:

•

Using the Baseline Shift allows you to adjust the Vertical alignment
of a specified character.

To use the Baseline Shift:
• Select the character(s) that you would like to shift:

•

Use the Nudge arrows to specify how much you would like to adjust
your character(s):

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

56
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Advanced Type
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Hyphenations

Hyphenations
•

Hyphenation allows you to
develop a clean
Justification of text
without breaking words.

Using
Hyphenations

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 22

•

Hyphenation allows for Justification of text without breaking words.
Sometimes left aligned text needs Hyphenation:

•
•

Consider Hyphenation for tightening stages of your publication.
Hyphenation can be found under Type > Hyphenation.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Advanced Type
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

57
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 23

Use Kerning?
Use Tracking?
Use Leading?
Use the Baseline Shift?
Use Hyphenations?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Advanced Color
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

59
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Advanced Color
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•

Use CMS
Work with CMS
Turn Off CMS

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

60
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Advanced Color
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

What Is CMS?

What is CMS?
•

The CMS system is
management software that
allows you to determine
colors under a variety of
devices.

Using CMS

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 24

•

The CMS system is management software that allows you to
determine colors under a variety of devices. This software ensures
consistent color throughout the printing process:

•

CMS maps color to display a close likeness of the color you see on the
monitor to be reflected onto the printed publication.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Advanced Color
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Working with
CMS

•

61
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

PageMaker comes with the Kodak Digital Science Color
Management System. This installs with PageMaker.

CMS color manages the following:
• Pre-separated images that are not already targeted to a final output
device.
• RGB Bitmap Images.
• Colors applied to PageMaker Objects.
• Spot Colors in EPS Files.
• Colors in the RGB screen Image of a CMYK TIFF File.
Turning Off
CMS

•

Go to File > Preferences > General > CMS Setup:

•

Within the first drop-down menu called Color Management select off:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

62
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Advanced Color
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 25

Use CMS?
Work with CMS?
Turn Off CMS?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Scripts
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

63
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Scripts
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Display the Scripts palette
Use the Scripts palette menu
Create Scripts
Add Scripts
Remove and Restore Scripts
Run Scripts
Edit Scripts
Trace Scripts

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

64
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Scripts
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Working with Scripts

Working With Scripts
•

Scripts are folders that
contain simple commands
and automated tasks that
allow you to speed up your
production time when it
comes to doing repetitive
tasks.

Displaying
the Scripts
palette

•

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 26

The Scripts are folders that contain simple commands and automated
tasks that allow you to speed up your production time when it comes
to doing repetitive tasks. There are a number of pre-installed scripts in
the Scripts palette.
You can create your own scripts, take existing scripts and customize
them for your own needs, and even trace scripts.
From the main menu, choose Window > Plug-in Palettes > Show
Scripts to display the Scripts palette:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Scripts
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Using the
Scripts
palette menu

•

The Scripts palette menus contain all the commands you need to
manage your scripts:

•
•

New Script enables you to create your own scripts.
Add Script - takes scripts from various locations and add them to your
palette.
Remove Script - removes scripts from the Scripts palette.
Restore Script - allows you to view and restore scripts that have been
removed from the Scripts palette.
Edit Script - makes changes to fine-tune or update your scripts.
Trace Script - allows you to trouble-shoot problem scripts. By running
your script step-by-step, you can easily pinpoint problems that need to
be fixed.

•
•
•
•

Creating
Scripts

65
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•
•

From the main menu, choose New Script from the Scripts palette
menu.
Specify the Folder or Sub-folder for the script in the Scripts folder.
Note: The Scripts folder is located in the
\RSRC\\Plugins\Scripts:

•
•
•

Enter a name for the script. The name should reflect the actions of the
script
Press the Save button.
Write the new script in the Edit Script dialog box, and then click the
OK button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

66
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Adding
Scripts

•

Scripts
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

You can add scripts to the Scripts palette by using the Add Script
command on the Scripts palette menu or by copying scripts to the
Scripts folder. You can also add scripts by dragging and dropping files
to the palette.

To use the Scripts palette to add scripts:
• From the main menu, choose Windows > Plug-in Palettes > Show
Scripts.
• From the palette menu, choose the Add Script command.
• In the Add Script dialog box, select a script, and then click the Open
button to add the script automatically to the Scripts folder in the Scripts
palette.
To drag and drop script files:
• From the main menu, choose Windows > Plug-in Palettes > Show
Scripts
• Select the desired file from the Windows Explorer or desktop.
• Drag the file over to one of the Scripts palette folders, and then
release the mouse button.
Removing
and
Restoring
Scripts

•

You can also remove scripts from the Scripts palette. When a script
is removed, only the display on the palette is removed. The removed
script is moved into a subfolder folder inside the PageMaker
directory.
To restore a deleted script, use the Restore command from the Script
palette menu.

To remove scripts from the Scripts palette:
• From the main menu, choose Windows > Plug-in Palettes > Show
Scripts.
• Select a script in the Scripts palette. You can remove only one script at
a time.
• From the palette menu, choose the Remove Script command.
To restore a removed script from the Scripts palette:
• From the main menu, choose Windows > Plug-in Palettes > Show
Scripts.
• From the palette menu, choose the Restore Script command.
• From the list of removed scripts, select the desired script to be
restored and click the Restore button.
Running
Scripts

•

Scripts that are run from the Scripts palette must be stored in the
Scripts folder. When you add Scripts they are automatically copied
to this folder.

To run a script:
• From the main menu, choose Windows > Plug-in Palettes > Show
Scripts.
• Double-click the desired script to run it.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Scripts
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

67
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Editing Scripts

Editing Scripts
•

PageMaker 6.5 comes
with a Script Editor that
allows you to Modify the
Pre-installed Scripts or
Newly created Scripts.

Editing
Scripts

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 27

From the main menu, choose Windows > Plug-in Palettes > Show
Scripts.
Press Ctrl, and click the desired script to be edited.
OR from Scripts palette, select the script and from the Scripts
palette menu, choose Edit Script.

•

Make the necessary modifications to the script, and then click the OK
button:

Note: For information on writing scripts, see the Script Language
Guide that comes with the PageMaker 6.5 Application.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

68
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Tracing
Scripts

•

Scripts
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

You can use the Trace Script command to help you understand what
the script is doing command by command. Slowing the script down
will help you pinpoint where any problems might be.

To trace a script:
• From the main menu, choose Windows > Plug-in Palettes > Show
Scripts.
• From Scripts palette, select the script to be traced.
• From the Scripts palette menu, choose Trace Script.
• In the Script Tracer window, choose one of the commands from the
Run menu:

•
•
•
•
•

Run – runs the entire script.
Step – runs the script one line at a time.
Step Out – runs a series of command sub-routines at one time.
Reset – stops the script from running without closing the Script
Tracer window.
Quit – stops the script from running and closes the Script Tracer
window.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Scripts
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

69
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 28

Display the Scripts palette?
Use the Scripts palette menu?
Create Scripts?
Add Scripts?
Remove and Restore Scripts?
Run Scripts?
Edit Scripts?
Trace Scripts?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Prepress Fundamentals
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

71
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Prepress Fundamentals
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Trouble-Shoot the Publication
Check your Images
Check your Fonts
Check Images and Colors
Update Links
Use Trapping Terms
Use the Save for Service Provider Plug-in
Generating Reports
Saving files for Service Provider

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

72
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Prepress Fundamentals
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Trouble-Shooting

Trouble-Shooting
•

•

When you are ready to print
your publication, there are
a few things to keep in
mind so you get back good
results from the
commercial printer who is
handling your files.
You will have to check your
Links and check your
Fonts, as well as the
resolutions on the pictures
you have placed into your
publication.

TroubleShooting the
Publication

•
•

•
•
•
Checking
your Images

•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 29

When you are ready to print your publication, there are few things to
keep in mind to ensure good results back from the commercial printer
who is handling your files.
Make sure the commercial printer has the necessary software, and
hardware needed to complete the job. Many printers will prep your
work and fix many of the problems for you, but this extra work does
not always come cheap. This is why it's best to do most of the work
yourself.
Before you begin working on your publication, it is always a good
idea to find out who will be printing the publication.
Ask them for their printing specs, along with what they expect from
you when you are delivering your work.
If there is anything you do not understand, make sure you ask for
clarification.
Check all the images within the publication. Make sure that they are
saved with the correct final printout size, and with the correct
resolution for output.
If any cropping, rotating or scaling needs to be done; do it in the
picture’s original application that created it, so it will output faster.
Always send a printed copy of the file, with the Registration marks
turned on when printed. This will give the commercial printer an idea
of what you’re expecting as the final output.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Prepress Fundamentals
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•

73
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

If a document either does not print
OR takes a surprisingly long time to print, check for any errors. Big
pictures, strangely shaped picture boxes and clipping paths can
contribute to printing errors.

•
•
Checking
your Fonts

•

If one very high resolution picture is being used multiple times, but
in different sizes in the document, import copies of the picture that
are saved at the required size.
Reducing the amount of unnecessary information in the pasteboard
of a document will aid the image setter.
Most commercial printers have their own library of fonts; however
it is best that you supply all the fonts used within your publication.

To Trouble-Shoot your fonts:
• Close down PageMaker and all other applications.
• Use your font management utility and disable all the fonts that are not
system fonts on your computer.
• Open the publication that will be sent to the printer.
• If you have used any non-system fonts in your publication, they will
show up in the Pantone Font Matching dialog box.
• Make a note of the missing fonts and close down PageMaker.
• Enable only the fonts that were missing and re-open your
publication.
• If you see the Pantone Font Matching dialog box again, make a
note of the fonts you might have missed and repeat the last two
steps.
• When all the used fonts are installed you will be able to open up the
application with no problems.
• Use your font management utility to copy all the enabled non-system
fonts so you can apply them to the printer. The Screen and Printer
fonts should also be supplied.
Note: If you placed any EPS files into your publication, check them
the same way to find out which fonts are being used in the EPS files.
If you have any fonts missing from the EPS file, you will get
PostScript errors, Couriered Text, or jagged text.
Checking
Images and
Colors

•
•
•
•
•

When using Pantone colors, visit your Printer and ask to see the
Pantone Swatch book. This is the best way to see how the color will
look after it is printed.
When using a tint of a spot color, use the Color palette to select a
shade percentage, or use a Trumatch of Focoltone color from the
main menu.
For a document with bitmapped images, check with the commercial
printer to find out which file format and image mode that the bitmapped
pictures should be saved in.
Convert all of your images from RBG to CMYK.
Convert any RBG or Spot colors created in PageMaker or imported
from EPS files to CMYK process color.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

74
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Prepress Fundamentals
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

If hand-drawn registration or crop marks are in the document, the
Registration color needs to be applied to them to make sure that all
will show on the separation plates.
Note: A general rule to follow is to have a color proof ordered if any
color document is being printed. This allows you to check the color
accuracy without losing an entire project.

Updating
Links

•

Use the Links Manager to check all of your links and to update any
missing links.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Prepress Fundamentals
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

75
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Trapping

Trapping
•

Trapping refers to when
you apply a slight overlap
of colors in order to stop
any spaces from
happening while printing just in case paper shifts,
stretches or plate
misalignment occurs.
1. Green is Chocked to Trap
the Red.
2. Red is Spread to Trap the
Green.
3. No trapping used.

Using
Trapping
Terms

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 30

Trapping - applying a slight overlap of colors in order to stop any
spaces from occurring while printing, in case a paper shift, stretch or
plate misalignment occurs. The principle is that trapping is applied to
a piece, based on how an object's color blends with the background
color of another item.
Overprint - mixing colors by printing a colored object in the
foreground prints completely over a colored object in the background.
This is used when black is the foreground color
OR if you want to intentionally mix colors to create a new third
color.

•

Knockout - removing a colored object in the foreground from the
background color to stop the inks from overprinting. This can cause
a gap between the foreground and background color edges, and
trapping will close the gap.
Spread - a method of trapping used when colors are knocked out
and the foreground color turns out to be lighter than the background.
The foreground color object has its edges enlarged a little bit to have
the foreground color spread out into the background color when at
press.
Choke - a method of trapping used when the foreground color is
darker than the background (opposite to the Spread method). The
background color object has its edges reduced a little bit to have the
background color spread into, or choke, the foreground color.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

76
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Prepress Fundamentals
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Using Save for Service Provider

Using Save For Service Provider
•

Using the Save for Service
Provider plug-in allows
you to copy your
publication, as well as all
linked image files, fonts,
and other files required to
print your document.

Using the
Save for
Service
Provider
Plug-in

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 31

Using the Save for Service Provider plug-in, you can copy your
publication, along with all linked image files, fonts, and other files
required to print your document.
Save for Service Provider plug-in can also help you resolve broken
links by prompting you to locate the folders containing linked files.
Similarly, this plug-in can also check the status of links and fonts in a
PostScript file generated by PageMaker 6.5:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Prepress Fundamentals
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•

77
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

You can also create a concise report of the information your service
provider needs to create output from a PageMaker or PostScript file.
The report includes details about fonts, linked graphics, a summary
of your print settings, as well as information about who to contact
regarding your publication:

•

The Fonts Tab:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

78
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Links/OPI Tab:

•

The Printing Tab:

Prepress Fundamentals
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Prepress Fundamentals
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Generating
Reports

79
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

The Inks tab:

•

From the main menu, Choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Save for Service
Provider.
The Save for Service Provider dialog box opens in the Summary tab.
Use the Check Pub button to preflight the active publication.
Use the Check .PS button if you want to check a PostScript file.
Use the Fonts, Links/OPI, Printing, or Inks Tabs to see detailed
reports on the different aspects of the publication or PostScript file.
Use the Print button to print the status information.
In the Links tab, use the Relink button

•
•
•
•
•
•

OR Relink All button to restore missing links.
Saving files
for Service
Provider

To package the publication:
• From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Save for Service
Provider.
• The Save for Service Provider dialog box opens in the Summary tab.
• Click the Package Button.
• From the Report Type drop-down list, choose Formatted (.p65) to save
the report as a PageMaker publication.
OR choose Text only (.txt) to save the report as an ASCII text-only file.
•
•

Use the Auto Open Package Report to display the summary report in a
new window after you save the publication and associated files.
Use the Update Links checkbox to update missing or old links in the
original publication before making a package.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

80
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

•
•
•

Prepress Fundamentals
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

From the Include section, check the Copy Fonts checkbox, and select
one of the kinds of fonts to copy. You have a choice of either All, Type
1 (PostScript), or TrueType. This option will help you to avoid having
missing font issues come print time.
Use the Notes button to enter contact details information, such as your
name and phone number, comments and click the OK button.
Specify the location to save all necessary files.
Click the Save button to begin packaging the publication.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Prepress Fundamentals
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

81
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 32

Trouble-Shoot the Publication?
Check your Images?
Check your Fonts?
Check Images and Colors?
Update Links?
Use Trapping Terms?
Use the Save for Service Provider Plug-in?
Generating Reports?
Saving files for Service Provider?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Paperless Printing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

83
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Paperless Printing
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Print to an EPS
Print to a File
Export PDF files
Convert PageMaker document to a PDF
Set the Paper Size
Save and Reuse settings

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

84
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Paperless Printing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Printing without Paper

Printing without Paper
•

Printing EPS files turns
your publication pages
into files that can be
imported and used in
another application that
supports EPS files.

Printing to an
EPS

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 33

Using EPS files gives you the ability to turn your publication pages into
files that can be imported and used in another application that
supports EPS files.

To create an EPS file:
• Press the Ctrl + P key combination
OR from the main menu, choose File > Print.
•
•
•
•

Choose a PostScript Printer and its corresponding PPD from the
Document window of the Print Options dialog box.
Press the Paper button and make the necessary adjustments to your
Paper window of the Print Options window, and press the Options
button.
From the Tiffs/Images section, select your method of Sending Image
Data, and the desired Data Encoding.
From the PostScript section, check the Write PostScript to file
checkbox and select the EPS radio button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Paperless Printing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Printing to a
File

85
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Enter a name into the Write PostScript to file field and press the
Save button:

•

When Printing from PageMaker 6.5 you do not always have to print
directly to the printer, you can create what is known as a Print file that
can be sent to a Postscript printer when you are ready to print out
your publication.

To Print a publication to a File:
• Press the Ctrl + P key combination
OR from the main menu, choose File > Print.
•
•
•
•

Choose a Postscript Printer and its corresponding PPD from the
Document window of the Print Options dialog box.
Press the Paper button and make the necessary adjustments to your
Paper window of the Print Options window, and press the Options
button.
From the Tiffs/Images section, select your method of Sending Image
Data, and the desired Data Encoding.
From the PostScript section check the Write PostScript to file
checkbox and select the Normal radio button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

86
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Paperless Printing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Enter a name into the Write PostScript to file field and press the
Save button:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Paperless Printing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

87
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Creating PDF files

Creating PDF files
•

The PDF (Portable
Document Format) file is a
good way to distribute files
around the world and on
both the MAC and PC
operating systems.

Exporting
PDF files

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 34

The PDF (Portable Document Format) file is a good way to distribute
files around the world and on both the MAC and PC operating
systems. The software to read the PDF format file is free to download
from the Adobe.com website, and also comes free as part of the
PageMaker 6.5 software package.
From the main menu, choose File > Export > Adobe PDF to open the
Export Adobe PDF dialog box:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

88
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Converting
PageMaker
document to
a PDF

•

Paperless Printing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Open the PageMaker publication that you would like to convert
OR create a new PageMaker publication.

•
•

From the main menu, choose File > Export > Adobe PDF.
Select Distill Now radio button.
Note: This option will only be available if Adobe Acrobat Distiller is
installed.

•

Select the View PDF Using option and use the drop down list to
choose a PDF viewer.
Note: This option is to be used if you want to open and display the
converted file immediately after it has been created.

•

Select the All radio button
OR select the Range radio button to specify the range of pages you
would like to export and click the Export button.

•
•
Setting Paper
Sizes

In the Save as dialog box enter a filename and specify a location for
the PDF file.
Click the Save button.

•

From the Export Adobe PDF dialog box, you have a choice of three
Paper Size options:

•

Same as Page Size - this option allows you to set the PDF document
paper size to the page size specified in the Document Setup dialog
box in PageMaker.
Apply Settings of Each Publication - This option is used when you
are converting a book with publications that use different page sizes to
PDF.
Apply Printer Style's Setting - this option allows you to use the paper
size specified in the PageMaker Printer Styles section of the Export
Adobe PDF dialog box.

•
•

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Paperless Printing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Saving and
Reusing
settings

•

89
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

You can save your settings that are specified when exporting a PDF,
so that you can reuse them again.

To save the settings:
• From the main menu, choose File > Export > Adobe PDF.
• Apply the settings you would like, using the available buttons and
options.
• Click the Save Settings button.
Note: Any previous settings that were saved, will be are replace.
To reuse the saved settings:
• From the main menu, choose File > Export > Adobe PDF.
• Click the Load Settings button.
Note: All of the saved setting will be applied to the Export Adobe
PDF dialog box as well as the sub-dialog boxes.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

90
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Paperless Printing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 35

Print to an EPS?
Print to a File?
Export PDF files?
Convert PageMaker document to a PDF?
Set the Paper Size?
Save and Reuse settings?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Web Publishing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

91
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Web Publishing
When you
have
completed
this learning
module you
will have
seen how to:

•
•

Prepare to Export to HTML
Convert publications to HTML

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

92
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Web Publishing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Exporting HTML

Exporting HTML
•

•

When preparing a
publication for export to
HTML, you must remember
that not all objects used in
the publication will
transfer.
Boxes, Ovals and
Polygons will not be
exported, only text and
graphics will convert.

Preparing to
Export to
HTML

•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 36

When you are converting files to HTML you will lose the boxes that are
drawn in PageMaker as well as many of the Plug-in commands that
you apply:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Web Publishing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•

The Edit Contents dialog box:

•

The Options dialog box:

93
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

94
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Converting
publications
to HTML

Web Publishing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

The New HTML Document dialog box:

To create an HTML file from a PageMaker publication:
• Open the publication you want to convert to an HTML file
OR create a publication to be exported.
•
•
•
•

From the main menu, choose File > Export > HTML.
From the Export HTML dialog box, click the Document button to set
the desired Document location and File Name.
Click the Graphic button to set the desired location for the converted
graphic files.
Click the Options button:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Web Publishing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

95
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

From the Options dialog box check the
Approximate layout using HTML Tables when exporting pages
checkbox.
In the Export Page width field, set the desired page width.
Check the Preserve character attributes checkbox.
From the Graphics section, select the desired file format to use when
converting the graphic images in your publication.
From the File Names section, select the desired naming convention
for the exported files.
Check the Down sample to 72dpi checkbox.
Click the OK button and click the Export HTML button to export the
publication.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

96
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Web Publishing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

Review Questions

How would
you:

•
•

Adobe PageMaker 6.5 - Slide No 37

Prepare to Export to HTML?
Convert publications to HTML?

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Adobe PageMaker 6.5
Advanced Level
Exercise Workbook

C C T G L O B A L

.C O M

Courseware Release Version 5.0

INSTALLING THE SAMPLE FILES INTO THE HARD DISK............................................................ 1
INSTALLING THE SAMPLE FILES ................................................................................................................... 1
WORKING ON BOOKS ............................................................................................................................. 3
BUILDING A BOOK LIST .............................................................................................................................. 3
CREATING A TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................................................. 5
LIBRARIES .................................................................................................................................................. 7
USING THE LIBRARY ................................................................................................................................... 7
ADVANCED PLUG-INS ........................................................................................................................... 11
COUNTING WORDS ................................................................................................................................... 11
TABLES ...................................................................................................................................................... 13
EXPORTING TABLES .................................................................................................................................. 13
ADVANCED TYPE.................................................................................................................................... 15
USING TRACKING ..................................................................................................................................... 15
ADVANCED COLOR................................................................................................................................ 17
TURNING OFF CMS................................................................................................................................... 17
SCRIPTS ..................................................................................................................................................... 19
APPLYING SCRIPTS ................................................................................................................................... 19
PREPRESS FUNDAMENTALS ............................................................................................................... 25
SAVING FOR SERVICE PROVIDER .............................................................................................................. 25
PAPERLESS PRINTING .......................................................................................................................... 27
CREATING A PDF...................................................................................................................................... 27
WEB PUBLISHING................................................................................................................................... 29
EXPORTING TO HTML.............................................................................................................................. 29

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE – Installing the Sample Files into the Hard Disk
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

1
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Installing the Sample Files into the Hard Disk
Installing the sample files
•
•

•

Use Windows Explorer to create a folder called PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Samples, in the
My Documents folder.
If you are installing the sample files from the CD-ROM, place the CD-ROM in the CD drive
and copy the files from the pagemaker_6_5_advanced\exercise_files to the My
Documents\PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Samples folder. If these files have been copied to
your network server, then ask your trainer/supervisor for more information about how to copy
these files to your PC’s hard disk.
Notes for tutors:
The above instructions are for Windows 95 - and for Windows 98 that has not been set-up for
a multi-user environment (with individual profiles). The instructions above may also require
modification within a Windows NT environment. Where possible pre-install the relevant work
files prior to use by students/delegates.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE - Working on Books
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

3
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Working on Books
Building a Book List
•
•
•

Use Windows Explorer to create a folder called PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Work Folder in
the My Documents folder.
Use Windows Explorer to create folders called For Output and For the Web in the
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Work Folder.
Launch PageMaker 6.5 and open the Table of contents.p65 file from the PageMaker 6.5
Advanced Samples folder:

•

Press the Ctrl + Shift + P key combination to display the Document Setup dialog box, and
click the Numbers button:

•
•

Select the Lower Roman radio button from the Style options, and click the OK button.
Check the Restart Page Numbering checkbox, and click the OK button. Notice the applied
page number style in the bottom-right area of the document:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

4
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Working on Books - EXERCISE
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

From the main menu, choose Utilities > Book to display the Book Publication List dialog
box.
Note: In the Files/Directories list, navigate to the PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Samples
folder so that all .P65 files appear in the list. You can do this by double-clicking on the
correct drive letter (for example, [-c-]) and the appropriate folders until the desired files are
shown:

•

Double-click the Chpter 1.p65, Chpter 2.p65, and Chpter 3.p65 publications to insert them
into the Book list
OR use the Insert button, to insert the Chpter 1.p65, Chpter 2.p65, and Chpter 3.p65
publications from the Files/Directories window, into the Book list window.
Note: The Table of Contents.p65 will automatically be inserted into the Book list for you.

•
•

Select the Next odd page radio button from the Auto renumbering options.
Click the OK button and click the Yes button when the Auto renumbering prompt appears:

Note: If the Printer warning window appears, from the main menu, choose File > Document
Setup and select your printer from the Compose to printer list.
•

Press the Shift + Ctrl + S key combination and save the file as TOC Book1.p65 into the
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Work Folder.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE - Working on Books
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

5
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Creating a Table of Contents
•

Still in the TOC Book1.p65 file, from the main menu, choose Utilities > Create TOC, and
apply the following settings to the Create Table of Contents dialog box:

Title - Advanced Contents
Include book publications - Checked
Include paragraphs on hidden layers - Unchecked
Format - Page number after entry
Between Entry and Page Numbers - ^t
•
•
•

Click the OK button and place the Loaded Text icon onto the page.
Click the Ctrl + S key combination to save the publication.
From the main menu, choose File > Close to close the document.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE - Libraries
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

7
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Libraries
Using the Library
•
•

Open the Chpter 1.p65 file from the PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Samples folder.
Note: If the Libraries palette is already open when you launch PageMaker 6.5, close the
palette by selecting the X at the far right of the Library palette:

•
•

From the main menu, choose Window > Plug-in Palettes > Show Library.
From the Library palette menu, select the Open Library option:

•
•

Open the Advanced Library.pml file from the PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Samples folder.
From the main menu, choose File > Place and place the Bee on snflwr.tif and the
Butterfly.tif files, from the PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Samples folder, into the publication.
Note: You will have to place each file separately. If you receive a prompt about the size of
any of the pictures, click the Yes button:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

8
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Libraries - EXERCISE
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•

From the Library palette menu, make sure the Edit item after adding option is unchecked:

•

Select the Bee on snflwr.tif picture in the publication and press the plus (+) button on the
Library palette to add this item to the Library.
Select the Butterfly.tif picture in the publication and press the plus (+) button on the Library
palette to add this item to the Library.
Delete both pictures from the publication page.
Select the Untitled-1 item (Bee) in the Library.
From the Library palette menu, select the Remove Item option, and click the OK button
when the error prompt appears.
Double-click the Untitled-2 item (Butterfly) and enter the following into the Item information
dialog box:

•
•
•
•
•

Title - Butterfly
Author - Your Name
Date - Current Date
•

Click OK button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE - Libraries
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•
•
•
•

9
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Select the Butterfly item and drag it onto the publication page 3.
Move the placed picture to the lower right corner of page 3 and snap the picture to the right
and bottom margins.
From the main menu, choose Window > Plug-in Palettes > Hide Library.
Press the Ctrl + Shift + S key combination and save the file as Chapter 1.p65 into the
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Work Folder.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE - Advanced Plug-ins
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

11
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Advanced Plug-ins
Counting Words
•
•
•

Close the Chapter 1.p65 file and open the Chpter 2.p65 file from the PageMaker 6.5
Advanced Samples folder.
From the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Word Counter.
Examine the results and press the Close button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE - Tables
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

13
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Tables
Exporting Tables
•
•
•

•
•
•
•
•
•

Minimize PageMaker 6.5.
Launch Adobe Table 3.0 (this application is installed as a part of PageMaker 6.5 typical
installation) and click the Cancel button when the New Table dialog box appears.
Open the Advanced Table.tbl file from the PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Samples folder:

From the main menu, choose File > Export > Graphic.
Navigate to the PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Work Folder and enter February 2002.eps into
the File Name field.
From the Save as type drop down list, select EPS (Include Fonts) and press the Export
button.
Choose File > Exit to close Adobe Table 3.0.
Maximize or Restore PageMaker 6.5.
Press the Ctrl + D key combination and open the February 2002.eps file from PageMaker
6.5 Advanced Work Folder and place it into the publication.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

14
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•
•

Tables - EXERCISE
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

With the placed EPS file selected, press the plus (+) button on the Library palette to add this
item to the Library.
Double-click the new item in the Library palette to open the Item information dialog box, and
enter the following information:

Title - February
Author - Your Name
Date - Current date
•
•

Press the OK button, and then delete the placed image from the publication page.
Press the Ctrl + Shift + S key combination and save the file as Chapter 2.p65 into the
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Work Folder.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE - Advanced Type
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

15
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Advanced Type
Using Tracking
•
•
•

Close the Chapter 2.p65 and open the Chpter 3.p65 file from the PageMaker 6.5 Advanced
Samples folder.
With the Text tool selected, place the cursor into the body of text and press the Ctrl + A.
Note: If the Control palette is already open when you launch PageMaker 6.5, close the
palette by selecting the X at the far left of the Control palette:

•
•

From the main menu, choose Window > Show Control Palette.
From the Control palette, select the Very Tight option from the Tracking drop down list:

•

Press the Ctrl + Shift + S key combination and save the file as Chapter 3.p65 into the
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Work Folder.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE - Advanced Color
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

17
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Advanced Color
Turning off CMS
•
•

From the main menu, choose File > Preferences > General.
In the Preferences dialog box click the CMS setup button:

•

Within the Color Management drop down list select the Off command and click the OK
button twice to return to the publication:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE - Scripts
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

19
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Scripts
Applying Scripts
•
•

Close the Chapter 3.p65 publication and open the Chapter 2.p65 file from your PageMaker
6.5 Advanced Work Folder.
Note: If the Master Pages palette is already open when you launch PageMaker 6.5, close
the palette by selecting the X at the far right of the Master Pages palette:

•

Press the Ctrl + Shift + 8 key combination to display the Master Pages palette:

•

From the Master Pages palette, double-click the Advanced Book master page to open the
Master Page Options dialog box.
In the Column Guides section of the Master Page Options dialog box, make the following
changes:

•

Left Master Column - 2
Space between - 0.25 inches
Right Master Column - 2
Space between - 0.25 inches
Adjust Layout - Checked
•

Click the OK button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

20
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Scripts - EXERCISE
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•

Note: If the Scripts palette is already open when you launch PageMaker 6.5, close the
palette by selecting the X at the far right of the Scripts palette:

•
•
•

From the main menu, choose Window > Plug-in Palettes > Show Scripts.
Using the Pointer tool, select the two columns on page 15.
From the Scripts palette, click on the arrow next to the Run Plug-ins script folder and
double-click the Balance Columns script:

•

From the Balance columns dialog box, select the following options:

Alignment - Bottom
Add leftover lines - Right
•
•

Click the OK button.
Press the Ctrl + S key combination to save your work.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE - Scripts
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•
•
•

21
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

From the Library palette, select the Butterfly item and drag it onto page 15.
Select the placed picture and press the Ctrl + Alt + E key combination to open the Text
Wrap dialog box.
Enter the following into the Text Wrap dialog box:

Wrap option - Middle icon
Text flow - Right icon
Left Standoff - 0.25
Right Standoff - 0.25
Top Standoff - 0.25
Bottom Standoff - 0.25
•
•

Click the OK button.
From the Control palette, set the image to 90.9% of its original size:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

22
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Scripts - EXERCISE
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•

Place the picture at the top right corner of the second column on page 15:

•

Go to the page 24. Notice the text on the right column is now flowing of the publication page.
Next you will adjust this text to fit the right column and place the remaining text onto page 25.
Using the Pointer tool, select the text in the right column on page 24.
With the Text Block selected, click bottom Windowshade handle that is flowing of the
publication page and drag the Windowshade handle towards the bottom margin of the
column:

•
•

•

Click the Red Arrow on the bottom Windowshade handle to transform the pointer into a
Loaded Text icon:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE - Scripts
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

23
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

•

Place the Loaded Text icon at the top left corner of the left column of page 25 and click the
mouse button to place the loaded text:

•
•

From the Library palette, select the February item and drag it onto page 25.
From the Control palette, set the image to 106.7% of its original size:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

24
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Scripts - EXERCISE
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•

Place the picture at the bottom left corner of the page margins on page 25:

•

Select and right-click page 26 icon, and select the Remove Pages option to remove page
26:

•

Press the Ctrl + S key combination to save your work.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE - Prepress Fundamentals
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

25
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Prepress Fundamentals
Saving for Service Provider
•
•
•
•
•

Still in the Chapter 2.p65 file, from the main menu, choose Utilities > Plug-ins > Save for
Service Provider.
From the Save for Service Provider dialog box, click the Package button.
From the Include section, check the Copy fonts option, and select the All radio button.
From the Report type drop-down list, choose Formatted (.p65) to save the report as a
PageMaker publication.
Click the Notes button to enter the following contact information:

Name - Enter your name
Company - Create a company name or Use the name of the School
Address - 123 Courseware Ave.
Telephone - 555-5555
Fax - 555-5511
Emulsion - Down
Page Image - Negative
Orientation - Normal
Media Type - Film
•

Click the OK button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

26
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Prepress Fundamentals - EXERCISE
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•

Specify the For Output folder in the PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Work Folder as the location
to save the files to:

•
•

Click the Save button to begin packaging the publication.
Click the Close button in the Save for Service Provider dialog box to return to the
publication.
Press the Ctrl + S key combination to save your work.

•

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE - Paperless Printing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

27
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Paperless Printing
Creating a PDF
•
•

Note: Please make sure that you have the Adobe Acrobat installed on your machine, before
creating a PDF file.
Still in the Chapter 2.p65 file, from the main menu choose File > Export > Adobe PDF and
enter the following into the Export Adobe PDF dialog box:

Workflow - Distill now
View PDF using – Acrobat (locate the Adobe Acrobat on your computer)
Include downloadable Fonts - Checked
Override Distiller's Job Options - Unchecked
PageMaker's printer style - Acrobat
Paper Size (s) - Same as Page size(s)
Pages - All
•
•

Press the Export button, and enter Full Book.pdf into the File Name field of the Save As
dialog box.
Navigate to the PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Work Folder and press the Save button.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE - Web Publishing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

29
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Web Publishing
Exporting to HTML
•
•

Still in the Chapter 2.p65 file, from the main menu, choose File > Export > HTML.
In the Export HTML dialog box, select the Untitled1 HTML Document Tile to display the
page Contents:

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

30
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Web Publishing - EXERCISE
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•

Click on the Document button to open the Document Save As dialog box:

•
•
•

Save the document in the PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Work Folder\For the Web folder.
Name the file Web Book.htm and click OK to return to the Export HTML dialog box.
Click on the Graphics button, and select the same location for the graphics: PageMaker 6.5
Advanced Work Folder\For the Web.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

EXERCISE - Web Publishing
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced

•

31
 2002 Cheltenham Computer Training

Click on the Options button to open the Options dialog box and make the following changes:

Approximate layout using HTML Tables when exporting pages - Checked
Export page Width - 612 Pixels
Preserve character attributes - Checked
Exports as - All Gif
File Names - Use short name (8.3)
Down sample to 72dpi - Checked
•
•
•

Click the OK to return to the Export HTML dialog box.
Click the Export HTML button to export files.
Launch the Web Book.htm file from your PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Work Folder\For the
Web folder to view the exported file in the Internet browser.
Note: To see examples of finished exercises, please refer to any of the files inside the
PageMaker 6.5 Advanced Samples\Work Folder.

FOR USE AT THE LICENSED SITE(S) ONLY
 Cheltenham Computer Training 1995-2002 - www.cctglobal.com

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : No
Author                          : Provided By MANUALSLIB.COM - http://www.manualslib.com/
Create Date                     : 2012:10:05 11:22:58Z
Keywords                        : manuals, instruction manuals, user manuals, service manuals, user guides, pdf manuals, owners manuals, installation guides
Modify Date                     : 2014:12:07 11:02:49+08:00
Subject                         : Search through 700.000 manuals online & and download pdf manuals.
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Provided By MANUALSLIB.COM - http://www.manualslib.com/
Description                     : Search through 700.000 manuals online & and download pdf manuals.
Title                           : ManualsLib - Makes it easy to find manuals online!
Creator Tool                    : pdftk 1.44 - www.pdftk.com
Metadata Date                   : 2014:12:07 11:02:49+08:00
Producer                        : itext-paulo-155 (itextpdf.sf.net-lowagie.com)
Document ID                     : uuid:f1e32f52-7aa3-4143-bb07-9ca890bb5110
Instance ID                     : uuid:18e8d4bc-117d-bf4a-b9dd-04c31eac1df6
Page Count                      : 490

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Adobe Pagemaker 6 5 Training Manual ManualsLib Makes It Easy To Find Manuals Online!

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation